Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 678

Automation College

MasterLogic:
Fundamentals - 200R Implementation

ML-1001 R400 Student Guide


Rev 03.1
04/2012
Book 1 of 1

Notices
While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate, Honeywell assumes
no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this courseware. The courseware is presented
on an as-is basis. Honeywell disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose, and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in its written
agreement with and for its customer.
In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect, special or consequential damages even
if Honeywell is informed of the possibility of these damages. The information and specifications in
this courseware are subject to change without notice.
No part of this courseware may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means. It is
intended for the use of the original purchaser only. Copying, duplicating, selling or otherwise
distributing the courseware is a violation of law. The materials and workbooks comprising the
courseware may not, in whole or part, be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated or reduced
to any electronic medium or machine-readable form without prior consent in writing from
Honeywell.
This courseware is the confidential and proprietary information of Honeywell. The courseware may
only be used by the person who attended the Honeywell class. The courseware may only be used
in conjunction with a Honeywell system at the company that paid for the class. Only Honeywell
may use the courseware for training purposes.
This class has special equipment configurations that are appropriate only for training and should
not be used for any other purpose.
Experion, Da Vinci, IntelliMap, MXOpen, MXProLine, TotalPlant, PlantScape, TDC 3000,
Uniformance, and Universal Control Network are registered trademarks of Honeywell International.
These commodities, technology or software were exported from the United States in accordance
with the Export Administration Regulations. Division contrary to U.S. law prohibited.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell Inc.

Honeywell International, Inc.


Automation College
Global Learning Services

Program Objectives
ML1001R400 - MasterLogic (ML) 200 Implementation
Tab
1

Lesson
Orientation and Course Introduction

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Additional MasterLogic Software Options

MasterLogic Programming Languages

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Objectives
Course Introduction
Describe the Purpose, Use and Value of ML200R
Describe the ML200R Controller Architecture
Describe Memory Types, their Addressing and
Retention
Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy
Describe the ML200R I/O Modules
Describe the ML200R Special Modules
Describe the ML200R Interface Modules
Identify the ML200R System Components
Verify the ML200R System Connections
Describe SoftMaster Features and Installation
Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software
Describe the Configuration of Basic Parameters
Describe the Configuration of IO Parameters
Describe the Configuration of Redundancy
Parameters
Describe the Basics of Project
Describe simulation in SoftMaster
Configure ML200R using SoftMaster
Describe the Import/Export Option
Describe the Compare Project Option
Describe the System Requirements of Other
Software
Describe the different Programming Languages
Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement
Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using
SoftMaster
Create Program Using ST
Create Program Using SFC
Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks
Create User Defined Data Types
Describe Network Manager within SoftMaster
Describe FENet Configuration
Describe SNet Configuration
Describe Profibus Interface Configuration Using
Sycon
Describe DeviceNet Interface configuration using
SYCON
Configure the Profibus communication
Page: 1 of 2

04/19/12

Program Objectives
7

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Experion Integration

10

Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station

11

LM-ML Migration Support

12

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

13

Reference

Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Describe MODBUS
Describe the High Speed Link
Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication
Configure a MODBUS Server
Configure a MODBUS Client
Configure the High Speed Link
Describe Various Online Functionalities in
SoftMaster
Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM
Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster
Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster
Describe Software Required for Experion
Integration
Difference between ML Server on Experion PKS
and LS
Describe ML Server Software Licensing with EXP
PKS
Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP
Integration
Install ML Server Software on Experion
Get an ML Server License for Experion PKS
Install ML Server License on Experion PKS
Configure ML Server for Experion Integration
Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder
Describe MasterLogic System Display in Station
Monitor Communication Status of ML Server
Interface
Monitor MasterLogic Status using Experion Station
Describe the LM to ML Migration
Describe Controller Diagnostics
Describe IO Diagnostics
Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules
Describe the ML200R SMART IO Modules
Describe Basics of Ladder Programming
Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale
Analog Input
Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display

Page: 2 of 2

04/19/12

Course Introduction

Orientation and Course Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Course Introduction
2/2/2012

Honeywell

Introduction
The MasterLogic(ML)200R
Implementation course provides
the end user with the ability to:

SoftMaster PLC
Engineering tool

MasterLogic PLCs

Plan an ML200R System


Configure the ML200R System
Configure the open networks
supported by the ML200R
System
Understand and Implement the
Integration of ML200R to an
Experion Server

Orientation and Course Introduction

Smart
Remote I/Os
Local Panel
Touch Screen
Panel

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Course Introduction
2/2/2012

Honeywell

Who Should Attend

This course is designed for ML200R System implementers responsible


for designing and/or configuring the system. These individuals include:
System Engineers or Application Engineers who are asked to configure the
ML200R PLC and add to or change the PLC configuration
Others, whose job functions include performing these tasks

Orientation and Course Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Course Introduction
2/2/2012

Honeywell

What You Will Learn


In this course, you will learn how to:

Recognize the role of the major hardware and software components and
learn data processing techniques of the ML200R PLC
Use the SoftMaster software tool to Program and Debug the ML200R
System
Configure the PLC Input-Output modules and bases
Configure Open Networks supported by the ML200R
Configure Channels, Controllers and Points in the Experion PKS System

Orientation and Course Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Course Introduction
2/2/2012

1
Honeywell

What You Will Not Learn


In this course, we will not cover:
Experion System Design and Implementation

Explanation and functionality of Open Networks (eg: Profibus, Devicenet,


etc.)

Orientation and Course Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Course Introduction
2/2/2012

Honeywell

Course Organization

The MasterLogic(ML)200R Implementation course is divided into the


following thirteen sections:
Section 1 - Course Orientation
Section 2 - MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation
Explains about ML200R architecture, as a controller and as part of an
Experion System
Section 3 - MasterLogic Software Introduction
Explains about SoftMaster which is a MaterLogic software tool
Section 4 - about Additional MasterLogic Software Options
Explains about Import/Export, compare project options in Softmaster and
Sycon software
Section 5 - MasterLogic Programming Software
It enhances the students knowledge about IEC 61131-3 based
languages used in the ML200R PLC

Orientation and Course Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Course Introduction
2/2/2012

Honeywell

Course Organization (Continued)

Section 6 and 7 - MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Explains the various communication practices implemented in the
ML200R System such as MODBUS and Profibus communication
Section 8 - explains about the Online Functions Available in SoftMaster
Section 9 - Experion Integration
The ML200R interface to the Experion System is explained and
practiced in this section
Section 10 - Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station
Describes the ML system displays in Experion Station
Section 11 - LM-ML Migration Support
Provides basic information about the LM-ML migration procedure
Section 12 - provides information about MasterLogic Troubleshooting
Practices
Section 13 - for Reference
Includes additional information about Ladder Programming
Contains hands on exercises which can be referred for additional
information on Function Blocks and displaying controller data on
displays
Orientation and Course Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Course Introduction
2/2/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Orientation and Course Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Course Introduction
2/2/2012

Describe the Purpose, Use and Value of


ML200R

Orientation and Course Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Purpose, Use and Value of ML200R


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Purpose of MasterLogic PLC

MasterLogic200R is the next generation Programmable Logic Controller


(PLC) from Honeywell
It is a part of the Experion System
It adds power and robustness to batch control capabilities of the Experion
Network
It is compact, powerful and versatile
Logic Manager (LM) can be migrated to MasterLogic(ML)

Orientation and Course Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Describe the Purpose, Use and Value of ML200R


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Use and Value of MasterLogic PLC


The MasterLogic or ML is a
cost-effective solution for:
Fast Logic Execution
Sequential Applications and
Batch Control Applications

MasterLogic Dedicated
Protocol (MLDP) integration
with Experion Server (explained
later)
Reduces engineering time
Brings in ML status alarms to
Experion System Status
Display

Orientation and Course Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

11

Describe the Purpose, Use and Value of ML200R


2/2/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Orientation and Course Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

Describe the Purpose, Use and Value of ML200R


2/2/2012

Describe the ML200R Controller Architecture

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Describe the ML200R Controller Architecture


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Introduction
Third Party
SCADA

Experion PKS Servers


Process & SCADA

Experion
HS\LS

F
T
E

F
T
E

C300

C200

Experion
Stations

F
T
E

F
T
E

SIL-3 Safety
PLC

F
T
E

SoftMaster-200
PLC
Engineering

F
T
E

F
T
E

Peer-to-Peer
MODBUS-TCP

F
T
E

F
T
E

Peer-to-Peer
ESVT

APP

Rail I/O

Wireless
Devices

MasterLogic PLCs

PM I/O

Direct integration
with TPS

TPS, TDC2000, TDC3000


(Investment Protection)

Digital Video Manager

Smart
Remote I/Os

SCADA
Devices
(OPC,
Modbus)

Local Panel
Touch Screen
Panel

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the ML200R Controller Architecture


2/2/2012

Honeywell

MasterLogic - Experion Architectural Features

MasterLogic (ML) PLC is one of the controllers in Experion architecture

Power Supply Modules are available to accept 110V/230V AC with 5.5A and
8.5A, and 24V DC voltage with 7.5A

MLDP (MasterLogic Dedicated Protocol) server is embedded in the FENet


Module of the Master Logic System

It provides a seamless integration with the Experion Server

Experion Server can access ML200R memory areas through MLDP


MLDP saves engineering time
Allows better memory access

Fast Ethernet Communication (FEnet) Modules of the ML200R System reside


on the Fault Tolerant Ethernet (FTE) Network

FEnet provides a high-level interface with Experion PKS Servers


It enables Peer-to-Peer Communication with other controllers in the Experion
Architecture
Peer Control Data Interface is used for Peer to Peer Communication with other
controllers in the Experion Architecture

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the ML200R Controller Architecture


2/2/2012

Honeywell

MasterLogic to Experion Interface

FEnet enables efficient integration between C300 and MasterLogic


200R PLC Controllers
Fast Ethernet at 100mbps

Three levels of redundancy are implemented in the ML200R


Redundant PLC
Two Ethernet modules (FEnet)
Redundant Experion PKS Server

IEC Data types are supported by the ML200R System


Ex: BOOL, BYTE, WORD, INT etc

Analog Input failure in the ML200R sets the PV status to BAD for
corresponding points in Experion using MLDP protocol

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the ML200R Controller Architecture


2/2/2012

ML200R uses built-in Scaling functionality available in Experion for configuration


and maintenance

Clock Synchronization can be configured between Experion Server and


MasterLogic PLCs

This also makes engineers work more comfortable

Experion Server acts as a Master and periodically monitors the RTC (Real Time
Clock) parameters of all MasterLogic PLCs in the same network
When drift between two clocks exceeds configured limits, PLC clock is synchronized
with Experion Server

MasterLogic PLC supports Sequence of Events (SOE) reporting

DI SOE module is also available for SOE reporting

MaterLogic PLC alarms and events can be archived in Experion

Experion Server sends a heart beat signal to all MasterLogic PLCs

A status indicating bit is configured as an SOE variable in the ML200R


The status of this variable can be viewed in the SOE display in Experion
It is dedicated I/O module

These alarms are consolidated with the Experion System alarms and events
The heart beat signal is a communication health status indicator

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Describe the ML200R Controller Architecture


2/2/2012

Honeywell

MasterLogic to Experion Interface Architecture


Experion Server
Quick Builder
-ML PLC Channel
-ML PLC Controller
-Points Configured

MLDP Point
Builder Utility

Quick Builder
Database

FTE

FTE

Experion Stations
(Flex / Console)
-PLC System Status
-Graphics
-PLC Alarms

HCI Server
for
ML PLC

Dual Ethernet

Dual Ethernet

Dual Ethernet

Dual Ethernet

MasterLogic Deticated protocol

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the ML200R Controller Architecture


2/2/2012

Honeywell

MasterLogic to Experion Interface (Continued)

Describe Memory Types, their Addressing


and Retention

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Memory Types, their Addressing and Retention

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

2/2/2012

Honeywell

CPU Memory Overview


CPU Memory Overview
Memory Type

Memory Size

Remarks

Built in Flash
Memory

16 MB

Used for Program Backup

Program Memory

3 MB

Program execution, upload and


system parameters

System Memory

4 MB

System data and parameter area

Data Memory

2MB

Direct and Symbolic variables

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Memory Types, their Addressing and Retention

2/2/2012

Honeywell

Data Memory Overview

Memory area
System area:
I/O data table
Forced I/O table
Reserved area

Flag area

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Memory Size

770 KB

System Flag (%F)

4 KB

Analog Image Flag

8 KB

PID Flag (%K)

16 KB

High Speed Link Flag (%L)

22 KB

P2P Flag (%N)

42 KB

Input image area (%I)

16 KB

Output image area (%Q)

16 KB

R area (%R or %W)

128 KB max.

Direct parameter area (%M)

256 KB

Symbolic parameter area (%A)

512 KB

Analog Data Register (%U)

32KB

Stack area

256 KB

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Memory Types, their Addressing and Retention

2/2/2012

Honeywell

Retain Memory Area Settings


Retain Memory Area Configuration Parameter:

It is used to configure memory Variables as Retain Memory Area Variable.


Hold the previous process values for variables during PLC restart and
Power Failure
Memory
Area

Retainable
(Yes/No)

Comments

%A

Yes

Can be configured as retainable memory area optionally. User must select


the Retain check box, while creating the new variable

%M

Yes

Maximum of 128 KB can be configured as retain memory area. User must


select the address range which can be retainable in the Basic parameters

%K

Yes

%L

Yes

%N

Yes

%R and %W

Yes

%I

No

%Q

No

%U

No

Always retainable since they are System parameter variables. No specific


configuration is needed
Always retainable. No specific configuration is needed

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Memory Types, their Addressing and Retention

10

2/2/2012

Data Memory Overview

Honeywell

Memory Area, Reset functions and Cold / Warm Restart

Retain Variables: Configured to hold the previous data value during


warm restart of PLC using the reset function and power failure of PLC.
Data of Retain Variables can be cleared using:
D.CLR Switch from CPU
Holding Reset Switch on CPU for more than 3 sec.
Using Overall reset function from SoftMaster
Note: When we reset Master CPU, Standby CPU also gets reset
CPU Reset

Data Clear (DCLR)

Reset
Normal Memory (Direct/Symb)
Cold
Restart
Mode

Clear

Battery
Fail

Power
Fail

All Clear (3Sec)

Clear

Clear

Clear

Clear

Clear

Clear

Retain Memory

Clear

Clear

Clear

Clear

Clear

Clear

%W (%R)

Hold

Hold

Hold

Clear

Hold

Clear

Flash Memory (Data)

Hold

Hold

Hold

Hold

Hold

Hold

Clear

Clear

Clear

Clear

Clear

Clear

Retain Memory

Hold

Clear

Clear

Clear

Hold

Clear

%W (%R)

Hold

Hold

Hold

Clear

Hold

Clear

Flash Memory (Data)

Hold

Hold

Hold

Hold

Hold

Hold

Normal Memory (Direct/Symb)


Warm
Restart
Mode

Overall Reset

* Data clear (DCLR) operation is available only on CPU STOP mode


MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Memory Types, their Addressing and Retention

2/2/2012

11

Direct and Symbolic Variables

Honeywell

Direct Variable : Variables which are accessed by using standard IEC


Addressing Notations
Can be configured with or without variable names
Can be accessed using hardware reference or register reference

Symbolic Variable: Variables which do not use standard IEC Addressing


Notations
Configured with variable name (Can be referenced only by variable name)
Data Access
Expression

Direct
Variable

Symbolic
Variable

Type / Range

Size

Comm. with
ext. Device

Sharing
with Int.
programs

Input

%I XX.X.X

%IX0.0.0 ~ 127.15.63

16KB

Output

%Q XX.X.X

%QX0.0.0 ~ 127.15.63

16KB

Internal

%M XX or
%M XX.X

%MW0 ~ 131,072

256KB

File
Register

%R XX or
%R XX.X
%W XX or
%W XX.X

%RW0 ~ 32767 (Block 0)


%RW0 ~ 32767 (Block 1)
%WW0 ~ 65535 (Block 0+1)

128KB
(2*64KB)

Character
(%A)

Bool/SINT/USINT/INT/DINT
LINT.

512KB

Local
Global

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Memory Types, their Addressing and Retention

12

2/2/2012

I/O Memory Structure and Expression


%IXX.X.X

Contact number (0 ~ 63, variable according to a unit)


Slot number (0 ~ 11)
Base number (1 ~31)
Unit (X:Bit, B:Byte, W:Word, D:Double Word, L:Long Word)
Input / Output (%I: IN, %Q: OUT)
%IX0.0.16

%IB0.0.1

%IB0.0.0

CPU

%IX0.0.48
IN 64
Slot 0

%QX0.1.0 %IX0.2.0
OUT 64
Slot 1

IN 64
Slot 2

Slot 3 ~ 11

%IW0.0.0
%IX0.0.15

%IX0.0.0

%IB0.0.3

%IB0.0.2

%IW0.0.1
%IX0.0.31

%IX0.0.16

%IB0.0.5

%IB0.0.4

%IW0.0.2
%IX0.0.47

%IX0.0.32

%IB0.0.7

%IB0.0.6

%IX0.0.0
%IX0.0.1
%IX0.0.2
%IX0.0.3
%IX0.0.4
%IX0.0.5
%IX0.0.6
%IX0.0.7
%IX0.0.8
%IX0.0.9
%IX0.0.10
%IX0.0.11
%IX0.0.12
%IX0.0.13
%IX0.0.14
%IX0.0.15

%IW0.0.3
%IX0.0.63

%IX0.0.31

%IX0.0.48

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

%IX0.0.63

%QX0.1.63

%IX0.2.63

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Memory Types, their Addressing and Retention

2/2/2012

13

Honeywell

Direct Variable Internal Memory


Internal memory structure and expression
%MXX.X
Bit Number (In case of bit expression)
Address (variable according to a unit)
Unit (X:Bit, B:Byte, W:Word, D:Double Word, L:Long Word)
Word
%MB1

%MB0

%MW0

%MW0

%MW1
%MX15 (%MW0.15)
%MB3

%MX1 (%MW0.1)

%MX0 (%MW0.0)

%MB2

%MW2
%MW3
%MW4

%MW1

%MW5
%MX31 (%MW1.15)
%MB5

%MX17 (%MW1.1) %MX16 (%MW1.0)


%MB4

%MW6

128Kword

%MW7
%MW8

%MW2
%MX47 (%MW2.15)
%MB7

%MX33 (%MW2.1) %MX32 (%MW2.0)

%MW9
%MW10

%MB6

%MW3
%MX63 (%MW3.15)

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

%MX49 (%MW3.1) %MX48 (%MW3.0)

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Memory Types, their Addressing and Retention

14

2/2/2012

Honeywell

Direct Variable IO Memory

Honeywell

Symbolic Variable & Memory Allocation


Automatic allocation

Auto_run
Automatic address
allocation

512
KB

User Defined
Allocation

Symbolic
Area (%A)

Water_Level

Valve_open
%IW0.0.7

%IX0.0.4

%IX0.0.0

User Defined
Allocation

%QX0.0.0

%MX7

%MX1 %MX0

%MB3
16
KB

16
KB
Direct Variable
Area (%I)

256
KB
Direct Variable
Area (%Q)

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Direct Variable
Area (%M)

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Memory Types, their Addressing and Retention

15

2/2/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Memory Types, their Addressing and Retention

16

2/2/2012

Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

17

Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Introduction
The ML200R provides a Redundant System for
CPU
Power
IO Cable (Ring Topology with dual paths)

Redundancy established through a dedicated high speed 1Gigabit


Fiber-optic Link
Control switches from Master CPU to backup CPU within 22 msec and
without any bump
Redundancy Synchronization comprises of the data and program memory
areas

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

18

Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Redundancy Features

Delay Time for Redundant Operation


System Data, like System Flag and Communication Flag, are synchronized
between Redundant CPUs every 2.8ms
Redundancy Parameter Synchronization
I/Q base: in 1ms for 32 bases
of IO
M area (Internal memory):
in 250 s for size of 2KB word
R (Retain) area: in 1.5ms
for 2KB word
PID area (K): in 0.5ms/PID Block
Automatic Allocated Variable:
for 32 KB, 2.5 ms added

Task

Sync cable between CPUs


and the Ring-type I/O
Network

Data Back-up

1Gbps Fiber Optic

Data Synchronization

Redundancy parameter
configuration

Parameter

Value

Switchover Time

4 to 22 ms

Delay Time for Redundant


operation

Proportional to data which master transmits to backup


Maximum 15 ms

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

19

Redundancy Status LEDs

Defines network that will be used for


I/O Connection
F: Fiber Optic
T: Twisted pair CAT5

Comprises of four LEDs; RED,


MASTER, CPU-A, CPU-B
RED ON or OFF indicates Redundant
or Single operation of the CPU
MASTER ON or OFF indicates the
current master or backup CPU
CPU-A and CPU-B are the CPU
classification LEDs
Redundancy
RUN/STOP LED
LED (RED)
Operational Status of CPU
Green Operational and RUN mode
Red Operational and STOP mode

Redundancy Status LEDs


RUN / STOP
LED
Warning LED
Error LED

Redundancy Sync Connector

Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy


2/2/2012

Honeywell

CPU Part Names and Functions

Requirements for Task

Operation Monitoring

Interface connector between CPUs for


monitoring and data sharing

CPU Redundancy
Designation Switch

CPU Redundancy designation switch

CPU classifier
In a redundant controller pair, one CPU
must be set to A while the other must
set to B

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Redundancy
Sync Connector

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

20

10

Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy


2/2/2012

ML200R
CPU Base

ML200R I/O
Base

In ML200R, a new 2-slot CPU Base is introduced along with the existing
6-slot CPU Base
In the 2-slot CPU Base, two FEnet Modules (Instead of six) can be
connected

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

21

Honeywell

Redundancy Hardware - Power Supply

Power LED: DC5V power display

RUN Terminal: Relay contact that


changes as per State of CPU.

Power LED
RUN Terminal
FG Terminal

Closed when CPU is in RUN.


Open when CPU is in STOP error or
STOP mode.

FG Terminal: Frame Grounding

LG Terminal: Line grounding


terminal

LG Terminal
Power Input
Terminal

Terminal Cover

Power Input Terminal: AC110V or


AC220V connection

Terminal cover: Unit Protection


Cover

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy


2/2/2012

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

22

11

Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Redundancy Hardware - CPU and I/O Base

Honeywell

Redundancy Operation - Procedure


Standby

Master
Program Execution

Data Sync.
by FB

Comm. Service &


Inner Process

Running

P
L
C

Output Refresh
Module Check

L
O
O
P

Module Check

Comm. Service &


Inner Process

Data Sync. in
Redundant
Operation

Input Refresh

Data Synchronization

Data Synchronization
Master Switchover
Management
&
Scan Sync.

Scan Sync.
regardless of
Operation Mode

Master Switchover
Management
&
Scan Sync.

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

23

Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Redundancy Operation Mode Changes

This table describes the resultant state of System (Master and Standby)
when an Operation Mode change is implemented by Key or SoftMaster
System Status
before Mode
change

Single Operation
(Master: Run,
Standby: STOP)

Redundant
Operation (Master:
Run, Standby:
Run)
Operation in
STOP mode
(Master: STOP,
Standby: STOP)

Mode Change
Master

Standby

RUN to STOP

No change: STOP

No change: RUN

STOP to RUN

RUN to STOP

No change: RUN

No change: RUN

RUN to STOP

STOP to RUN

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

System Status after mode change


When Master is stopped, System is in
stopped.
When Standby is changed to run,
System is in Redundant Operation
Mode.
When Master is stopped, Standby CPU
takes over System Control to become
Master; System is in Single Operation
Mode.
When Standby is stopped, System is in
Single Operation Mode. Master is in
control of system.

The first-Run-mode-change CPU (A or


No Change : STOP B) takes the control to become Master;
System is in Single Operation Mode.
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

24

12

Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy


2/2/2012

Pre-Conditions in Redundant Mode for successful Switchover Operation


Master and Stand by CPU in RUN Mode
CPU Sync. Cable (Fiber Optic Link) is connected between Master and
Standby CPU

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

25

Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Redundancy Mode Switchover


Conditions for Automatic Switchover

Failure of both power supplies of Master CPU


Master CPU in Stop Mode due to faulty operation
FEnet module in Master Base is detached
Fault in CPU Module (CPU Module is detached)
I/O Module in Extension Base is detached
System Error in Master CPU (Watchdog Error)

Conditions for Manual Switchover


Key Switch on Master CPU is set to STOP
CPU Mode is changed to STOP Mode from Softmaster by using:
Master Switchover Command
MST_CHG Instruction

Conditions in which Switchover DOES NOT Take Place


Failure of one of the redundant power supplies
Standby CPU is not in RUN Mode when Master CPU Stops
Mask Flag on interface module or I/O module is set for Error
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

26

13

Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Pre-Conditions in Redundant Mode for Switchover

Honeywell

Restart Mode in PLC

Restart Mode decides the method of initialization of the variables and


system at the time of Startup of the PLC Operation
At the time of Startup of the Standby PLC, it executes initialization of the
variables according to the Restart Mode programmed for it. But after
that, it receives the data and program backup from the master PLC
Restart Mode Types
Cold Restart and Warm Restart

Initialization of the variables depend on the following:


Variables configured with Default Settings
Variables defined in Retain Area of Memory
Variables whose initial value is programmed in the initialization task of PLC

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

27

Variable Initialization During PLC Restart

Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy


2/2/2012

Honeywell

The following table gives details of the Variable Initialization in Cold and
Warm Restart of the PLC.
Mode

COLD Restart

Setting

WARM Restart

Default or no Settings
configured

All variables are initialized


to zero

All variables are initialized


to zero

Retain area settings done

All variables are initialized


to zero

Previous process value


retained

Initialization task programmed

User-defined value as
programmed in initialization task

User-defined value as
programmed in initialization task

Retain and Initialization

User-defined value as
programmed in initialization task

Previous process value


Retained

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

28

14

Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy


2/2/2012

Data Retain Area in Operation


Retain (Data
%M area
M emory)
(Retain)
Holding previous Holding previous
Reset
Value
value
All variables are All variables are
Over all reset
initialized to zero initialized to zero
DCLR
All variables are All variables are
(toggled for <
initialized to zero initialized to zero
3sec)
DCLR (more All variables are All variables are
than 3 sec) initialized to zero initialized to zero
Holding previous Holding previous
STOPRUN
value
value
Item

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

29

%R area
Holding previous
value
Holding previous
value
Holding previous
value
All variables are
initialized to zero
Holding previous
value

Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy


2/2/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

30

15

Describe the ML200R Controller Redundancy


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Redundancy Operation - Data Retention

Describe the ML200R I/O Modules

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

31

Describe the ML200R I/O Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

ML200R - Digital Input Modules

Available in 8, 16, 32 and 64


Channels
110V AC DI Cards (16 Channels)
available
220V AC DI Cards (8 Channels)
available
LED for Channel Status
Indication
24V DC Input Modules (8,16,32
and 64 Channels) in sink/source
or only source type available
Photocoupler Isolation

For 64 Channel I/O


Module Switch selects
which LEDs indicated

Used for field to circuit isolation

Easy maintenance Terminal


Block Type

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

32

16

Describe the ML200R I/O Modules


2/2/2012

Double click on IO Parameter Option


Double click the on already added module to view the Configuration
Options available for the Digital Input Module
Input Module Settings: User is able to configure the Filter Constant Value for
the Input Signal in this Parameter Window.
Filter Constant Value
Configuration Options

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

33

Honeywell

ML200R - Digital Output Modules

Describe the ML200R I/O Modules


2/2/2012

Available in 8, 16, 32 and 64


Channels
Relay, Traic and Transistor
Modules (sink or source type)
LED for Channel Status Indication
Photocoupler Isolation
Easy Maintenance Terminal
Block Type
Thermal Protection

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

34

17

Describe the ML200R I/O Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

DI Module Configuration Option

Honeywell

DO Module Configuration Options

Emergency Output Setting: Used to set the output signal behavior in


case of a failure
Hold: Output signal Holds the current output value
Clear: Output signal is Cleared

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

35

Describe the ML200R I/O Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

ML200R System

The ML200R System has a


Dedicated I/O Network which
connects through the
Expansion Driver Module

The I/O Network is set on a


Ring Topology

CPU Redundancy
Cable

On Single Network failure, Bus


Topology applies for I/O
Network Communication

Any Module Type (DI, AI etc.)


can be assigned to any Base or
Slot except Base 0
Base 0 allows only
Communication Modules such
as FEnet

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Dedicated
IO Network

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

36

18

Describe the ML200R I/O Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

ML200R System now has dual I/O link redundancy


Expansion Driver Modules having Redundancy are introduced
Expansion Base supporting Redundant Expansion Driver Modules is
introduced

Slots for Redundant


Expansion Driver Modules

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

37

ML200R System with Redundant I/O Link

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

38

19

Describe the ML200R I/O Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Describe the ML200R I/O Modules


2/2/2012

ML200R System with Redundant I/O Link

Describe the ML200R Special Modules

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

39

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Introduction
Special Module Types:

Analog Input
Analog Output
Temperature Measuring
SOE Module
High Speed Counter

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

40

20

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

Key Features of 2MLF-AV8A

Voltage Module and Current Module


High Speed A/D Conversion &
Processing
250s / Channel
High Resolution
16 Bit
Easy Configuration via SoftMaster
LED Status Displays for RUN/ERROR
conditions
Channel can be individually Enabled/
Disabled
Input Signal Disconnection Status is
available for each Channel

Part Number Identification

2MLF-AV8A
F = Analog I/O

8 Channels Voltage and Current


Modules (2MLF-AV8A, 2MLF-AC8A)

A = A/D : AI Module
D = D/A : AO Module

4 Channels Isolated AI card (Voltage


and Current 2MLF-AD4S)

V = Voltage Module
C = Current Module
No. Of
Channels

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

41

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

Analog I/O Modules


Module Type

Honeywell
Part Number

Description

2MLF-AV8A

Voltage Input: 8 Channels


DC 1~5V/0~5V/0~10V/-10~10V

2MLF-AC8A

Current Input: 8 Channels


DC 0~20mA/4~20mA

2MLF-AD8A

Voltage/Current Input: 8 Channels

2MLF-AD4S

Voltage/Current Input: 4 Channels


Isolation Between Channels

2MLF-AD16A

Voltage or current input, 16 channels

2MLF-DV4A

Voltage Output: 4 Channels


DC 1~5V/0~5V/0~10V/-10~10V

2MLF-DC4A

Current Output: 4 Channels


DC 0~20mA/4~20mA

2MLF-DC4S

Current Output: 4 Channels


Isolation Between Channels

2MLF-DV8A

Voltage Output: 8 Channels


DC 1~5V/0~5V/0~10V/-10~10V

2MLF-DC8A

Current Output: 8 Channels


DC 0~20mA/4~20mA

Analog Input

Analog Output

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

42

21

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Analog Input Modules

Analog Input Modules

Honeywell
Designation

2MLF-AC8A
RUN

C
H
O
C
H
O
C
H
O
C
H
O
C
H
O
C
H
O
C
H
O
C
H
O

1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A

RUN LED

Details
Displays the operation status of
2MLF-AV8A or 2MLF-AC8A
On: Normal Operation
Flickering: Error occurs
Off: DC 5V disconnected, 2MLFAV8A /2MLF-AC8A module error

TR BLOCK

B
C

Analog input terminal, whose


respective channels can be
connected with external devices.

D
E
F

4-20mA
0-20mA

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

43

Analog Input Module Configuration Options

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Filtering Process option is used to remove the noise present in the input
signal

Used to Enable/Disable
the channel and
configure the I/P and
Output Ranges
Enter the Filter Constant
Value (1-99) if the Filter
Process is Enabled
Select to apply the same
settings to all channels
in module
Enable Hold Last Value
feature for the Analog
Input Channel
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

44

22

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Averaging Function is mainly used in the A/D conversion of Abnormal


Analog Input Signal
e.g. Analog Input signal with high noise or surge
Executes the A/D conversion for channel with specified frequency or time
interval

Average of all accumulated values is transferred to the Analog Input


Channel

Count-Avr: 2 64000 times


Time-Avr: 4 16000 msecs
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

45

Honeywell

ML200R - Analog Output Modules

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

High Speed D/A Conversion and Processing


14 Bit High Resolution
8 Channels Voltage and Current Modules
4 channels isolated AO card (Voltage and Current)
LED for Module RUN Status Indication
Each Channel can be Individually Disabled/Enabled

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

46

23

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

Averaging Functions in Analog Input Module

Honeywell

Analog Output Module Configuration Options

Used to Enable/Disable
the channel and
configure the I/P and
Output Ranges

Select Channel Output


Type in case of Channel
or Communication
Failure

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

47

Honeywell

Analog Input/Output Modules


Analog Voltage Module
Analog Input
Digital Output

1~5V

0~5V

0 ~ 10 V

Analog Input
Range

-10 ~ 10 V

Resolution
(1/16000)

Unsigned Value

0 ~ 16000

1~5V

0.250 mV

Signed Value

-8000 ~ 8000

0~5V

0.3125 mV

0 ~ 10 V

0.625 mV

-10 ~ 10 V

1.250 mV

Precise Value

1000 ~ 5000

0 ~ 5000

Percentile Value

0 ~ 10000

-10000 ~ 10000

0 ~ 10000

Analog Current Module


Analog Input
Digital Output

4 ~ 20

0 ~ 20

Unsigned Value

0 ~ 16000

Signed Value

-8000 ~ 8000

Precise Value

4000 ~ 20000

Percentile Value

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

0 ~ 20000

Analog input
range

Resolution
(1/16000)

4 ~ 20

1.0 A

0 ~ 20

1.25 A

0 ~ 10000

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

48

24

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

Key Features

2MLF-RD4A
RUN
ALM

C
H
O

C
H
O

Number of channels available: 4

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A

A
C
B
H
b
O

C
H
O

RTD Module is identified as 2MLF RD4A

A
B
b

A
B
b

A
B
b

Two types of RTD Sensors supported:


PT 100
J PT 100
Functionality to sense disconnection of
the sensor per channel is available

B
C

Temperature representation to first


decimal place is available

D
E
FG

Can sense temperatures from -200 deg C


to 850 deg C

PT100
JPT100
4A

Accuracy within 0.2%

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

49

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

RTD Module
Designation

2MLF-RD4A
RUN
ALM

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A

A
C
B
H
b
O

C
H
O

C
H
O

C
H
O

A
B
b

A
B
b

A
B
b

Details

RUN LED

Displays the H/W Operation Status ( Fatal Error)


ON: Normal State
FLICKERING: Error State (0.2s)
OFF: DC 5V Disconnected H/W Error

ALM LED

Displays The Status of the Channel (Non Fatal


Error)
ON: Normal State
FLICKERING: Disconnect Sensed (1 s)

B
C

OFF: Operation Stops for all Channel

D
E
FG

PT100
JPT100

TR BLOCK

3-Wire RTD Sensor can be connected

4A

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

50

25

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

RTD Module

Honeywell

RTD Module Configuration Option


RTD Module Configuration Options
Used to Enable/Disable
the channel and
configure sensor type
and Engineering Units

Specify the filter


constant value

Select the required


Scaling type. Options
available are Bipolar and
Unipolar

Specify the min. and


max. Scaling values and
Process alarm Limit
values

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

51

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

RTD Module Configuration Option


RTD Module Configuration Options

Specify the Average


processing value
according to selected
Average processing
method

Specify the high and low


limit values for RCA

Select the RCA type

Specify the RCA time


interval

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

52

26

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Sampling: This method is selected by default and the averaging function


is disabled if this method is selected
Time-Avr and Count-Avr: These functions are already explained in the
Analog Input module slide
Moving Average: In this mode, all temperature converted values on a
specific channel for specific number of times, are added and the
average is produced on the channel as digital data
Samples are taken for every 40 msecs and its output is passed to the
channel in every scan

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

53

Honeywell

Thermocouple Module
Key Features

Input sensor
Type

Temperature Input
Range

-250~13500 deg C

9 types of sensors available:


K/J/E/T/B/R/S/N/C

-250~12000 deg C

-250~10000 deg C

Functionality to sense disconnection


between the thermocouple

-250~4000 deg C

400~13500C

-50~17500C

Thermocouple Module is identified


as 2MLF-TC4S
Number of Channels available: 4

Temperature sensor, compensating


cable, and modules are available
Temperature is displayed in
Fahrenheit or Celsius

-50~17500C

-270~13000C

0~23000C

Temperature representation to the


first decimal place is available
Accuracy within 0.1% at 25 C

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

54

27

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

Average Processing Functions in RTD Module

Honeywell

DISOE Module
DISOE Module detects and records the events
from the field devices with 1ms resolution
Logged events will be permanently stored in
the module
Maximum of 300 events are supported per
module

Event logs from individual SOE modules are


stored in the CPU memory (max. 3000 events)
These logs can be periodically transferred to the
Experion Server
Maximum of 3000 events are supported per
CPU

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

55

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

DISOE Module Configuration Options


Input Filter Time: Time interval used to identify the event

Defines the time until which the input must remain in the new state to
consider it as an event

Recommended Input Filter time settings:


Input Filter <= Chattering time interval / Events (No.)
Chattering time and Event (No.) are configuration parameters of SOE
module explained in next slide

Specify the time


interval used to
identify the event

Used to store the latest events. If the


event count exceeds more than 300,
the oldest event gets deleted and the
latest event gets saved
Used to store the oldest events. If the
event count exceeds more than 300, then
the oldest events are retained

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

56

28

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

Enter the No. of events.


Range is 2 to 127. Enter
0 to disable this feature

Chattering Time: SOE signal is monitored to count the No. of generated events for
the time interval configured in this parameter
Event (No.): Enter the Max. No. of events allowed to occur within the chattering
time interval in order to store the event as an SOE event
Event type: Configure the event type (Rising or Falling or Both) for input signal
Condition

Event status

No. of events generated within specified Chattering time interval > No. of
events configured in Event (No.) parameter

All the events discarded

No. of events generated within specified Chattering time interval <= No. of
events Configured in Event (No.) parameter

All the events recorded as SOE


events as per SOE History
configuration

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

57

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

High Speed Counter Module

Honeywell
Key Features
ML200R HSC Module can
count a maximum of 500kpps
High Speed Counter requires a
Pulse Input
Incremental Encoder
Supports various Pulse Input
voltages (5V, 12V, 24V)
Preset / Totalizer function
Two built-in transistor outputs
LED status displays for Input,
Output and module READY
conditions.

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

58

29

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

DI SOE Module Configuration

High Speed Counter Module


Designation

2MLF-HD2A
CH0
RDY
CH1
0A0B P G 00 01

Honeywell

1 LED
Display

LINE DRIVE

AI- AIAII- AIIBI- BIBII- BIICH P12V


0
P24V
P_C P5V
G12VG24V
GCOMG5V
AI- AIAII-

AII-

BI-

BI-

Details
A

A-phase pulse input

B-phase pulse input

External preset input

External gate input

Out0

OUT0 compared output

Out1

OUT1 compared output

Ready Ready signal

BII- BIICHP12V
1
P24V

2 IO
Connector

P_C P5V

Terminal for I/O with


external device

G12VG24V
GCOMG5V
OUT 0
CHOUT1
0
CHOUT1
1
OUT 0
24V 24V
24G 24G
DC 24V
2MLFHD2A

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

59

Honeywell

High Speed Counter Module


Part Number Identification

2MLF-HO2A
O = Open Collector Module
D = Differential Input Module

No. of
Channels

Open Collector Modules can count a Max of 200 kpps


Differential Input Modules can count a Max of 500 kpps
Number of channels in both modules: 2

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

60

30

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

High Speed Counter Module features the following modes:


Pulse Input Mode
Compared Output Mode
Counter Mode
Auxiliary Mode
Carry and Borrow Signal Mode

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

61

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Pulse Input Mode


1-Phase 1-input 1-multiplication operation mode
1-Phase 1-input 2-multiplication operation mode
1-Phase 2-input 1-multiplication operation mode
1-Phase 2-input 2-multiplication operation mode
2-Phase 1-multiplication operation mode
2-Phase 2-multiplication operation mode
2-Phase 4-multiplication operation mode
B Pulse Low: Forward Count, A Pulse Low: Reverse Count

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

62

31

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

High Speed Counter Module

Honeywell

1-Phase 1-input 1-multiplication Operation Mode

The Counter counts A phase input pulses on the rising edge


Up or Down count settings:
Can be done by using the program or by using the up/down count signal

UP/DOWN counting signal

A phase input pulse rising

OFF

UP COUNTER

ON

DOWN COUNTER

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

63

A phase input pulse falling

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Compared Output Mode

In this mode, the current count value is compared with Compared count
Compared count is used as a reference count value to compare with the
current count value

If the condition is true, then only the output signal is generated


Seven conditions can be used for comparison:
Present Value < Compared Value
Count Value Compared Value
Count Value = Compared Value
Count Value Compared Value
Count Value > Compared Value

Count Value Compared Value1, Count Value Compared Value2


Count Value Compared Value1, Count Value Compared Value2

Once the condition is set to obtain the output signal on the counter
channel; the following signals are needed to be ON:
Compared Enabled signal, and
Output Enabled Signal
MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

64

32

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

This slide explains the Present Value < Compared Value condition
If the present value is less than the compared value, then the output
signal is provided to the output of the High Speed Counter module

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

65

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Counter Mode

Linear Count Mode


When the Upper/Lower count limit is reached in this mode, the Carry/Borrow flag is
set and the count operation is Stopped in this mode

Counting
Mode

0H address for CH0 and 19H for CH1


(Internal Memory)

Linear
Count

Set to 0

Ring
Count

Set to 1

Ring Count Mode


When the Upper/Lower count limit is reached in this mode, the Carry/Borrow flag is
set but the count operation is Restarted again

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

66

33

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Present Value < Compared Value

Honeywell

Auxiliary Mode

High Speed counter module provides the following 6 Auxiliary modes


To use the Auxiliary Modes, the Auxiliary Mode Enabled Signal must be
ON.
Count Clear: Used to clear present count
Count Latch: Used to latch the present count
Sampling Count: Used to count from 0 for the specified time
Input Frequency Measure: Used to measure the frequency of the input
signal
Revolution/ Unit Time: Used to count the number of pulses
Count Disable: Stop the count operation

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

67

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

68

34

Describe the ML200R Special Modules


2/2/2012

Describe the ML200R Interface Modules

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

69

Describe the ML200R Interface Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

MasterLogic 200R series supports the following open networks through the
individual communication modules
High-speed Ethernet or FEnet modules for the communication with Experion PKS or
other HMI systems
Available on TP-CAT5 or multi-mode fiber-optic media
FEnet also supports Peer-to-Peer communication
Serial Communication or Snet Module for communication between the PLC and the
serial devices
Profibus-DP master module or Pnet for communication with Profibus-DP
Includes communication with Smart I/O modules
Profibus Slave Interface module is used for ML I/Os with other Profibus master
controllers like PMD, C300
DeviceNet master module or Dnet for communication with DeviceNet devices
Includes communication with Smart I/O modules

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

70

35

Describe the ML200R Interface Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Fast Ethernet / FEnet


Key Features of FEnet
Supports TCP/IP and UDP/IP protocols
High Reliability and performance with a
32 bit processor
Fiber Optic Module is available
With the help of SoftMaster-NM, it
communicates with third party products
Provides E-mail service
Operates on a maximum speed of
100Mbps
Provides ONEIP Solution

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

71

Describe the ML200R Interface Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Serial Communication / Snet


Key features:
3 types of modules are available:
RS-232C with 2 Ports
RS-422 (485) with 2 Ports
RS-232C 1Port / RS-422 1Port
Connects to 32 devices using an
RS 485/422 connection
Used for MODBUS communication
It can act as both Master and
Slave
Maximum distance is 500 meters
using RS422 protocol
Extensive and detailed Diagnostics
using SoftMaster-NM

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

72

36

Describe the ML200R Interface Modules


2/2/2012

Profibus - DP
Low Cost network appropriate for field
level
Fast Slave communication
Maximum distance of the network is
1200 meters
Convenient parameter setting through
Sycon and the HS link parameter
Can be used for communication with
third party PLCs
Maximum communication speed is 12
Mbps

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

73

Describe the ML200R Interface Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Profibus-DP Using Pnet


SoftMaster PLC Engineering
and
SYCON Configuration tool

MasterLogic PLC

Serial / USB

CNC

SMART IO

SMART IO
Sensor

Repeater
SMART IO

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

SMART IO

SMART IO

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

74

37

ET200M

Describe the ML200R Interface Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Profibus-DP / Pnet

Honeywell

Profibus Remote Interface Module


Used to interface MasterLogic I/Os with other
controllers such as C300, and PMD which can be
used as Profibus-DP master devices
Acts as a Profibus-DP Slave sending I/O details and
diagnostic information to the Profibus master devices
Installed in the CPU slot of the ML200 chassis
Can be configured using a separate tool named
Extended Adapter
Present in Start All Programs SoftMaster

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

75

Describe the ML200R Interface Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Profibus Remote Interface Module


I/O modules supported with Profibus Remote Interface module

Example: For temperature measurement 2MLF-TC4S and 2MLF-RD4A


module types can be used
Detailed list of supported module types is available in Pnet Remote I/F
Module (2MLL-PSRA) User Guide
Profibus Remote
Interface Module
MasterLogic I/O
modules

PMD Controller
ML200 Controller Chassis

ML200 Controller Chassis


MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

76

38

Describe the ML200R Interface Modules


2/2/2012

Used to interface MasterLogic I/Os with


other controllers such as C300, and
PMD which can be used as Profibus-DP
Master Devices
Acts as a Profibus-DP Slave sending
I/O details and diagnostic information to
the Profibus Master Devices
Installed in the I/O Slot of the ML200 or
ML200R I/O Chassis
Can be configured using SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Describe the ML200R Interface Modules


2/2/2012

77

Honeywell

Profibus Slave Interface Module Architecture


With ML200R and Profibus Master (2MLL-PMEA)
ML200R

Power

FEnet Interface
Modules

ML200R Controller
Chassis

Expansion Base1
Profibus Master
(2MLL-PMEA)

Expansion Drive
Module(2MLR-DBST)

Power

Other Interface
Modules

Expansion Base2
Backplane Bus

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Profibus Slave
(2MLL-PSEA)

Power

Expansion Drive
Module(2MLR-DBST)

Profibus-DP
Communication

I/O Modules

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

78

39

Describe the ML200R Interface Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Profibus Slave Interface Module (2MLL-PSEA)

Honeywell

Profibus Slave Interface Module Architecture


With third party Profibus Master

Profibus Slave
Interface Module
MasterLogic I/O
Modules

PMD Controller
ML200/ML200R I/O Chassis

ML200/ML200R I/O Chassis

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

79

Describe the ML200R Interface Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

DeviceNet / Dnet
DeviceNet
Open communication with all DeviceNet
devices like actuators, sensors, drives, etc.
Flexible communication speed setting
125, 250, 500 Kbps
Flexibility in network configuration
Supports Multi-drop and T-branch
connection
Maximum communication distance is 500m
Easy configuration through SyCon software and
the HS link parameter
Can perform diagnostics and status monitoring
of slave modules in the network using Autoscan

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

80

40

Describe the ML200R Interface Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell
Fast Ethernet

Snet

PROFIBUS

DeviceNet

Speed

100/10Mbps

300~11.5kbp
s

9.6k ~12Mbps

125k/250k/500kbps

Physical Layer

IEEE802.3U 100baseTx,
100baseFx

RS232C \
RS422 \
RS485

RS485

CAN

Distance

100m (Node UTP/STP)


2Km (Node Fiber optic)

Max 500m
(RS422 / 485)

Max 1.2Km

100/250/500

Station
Service

64

32

126 (32/segment)

64 (1 master + 63 slave)

HSL

Yes

NA

Yes

Yes

MLDP

Yes

Yes

NA

NA

Common Protocol

Yes (Modbus)

Yes (Modbus)

NA

NA

P2P

Yes

Yes

NA

NA

SoftMaster-200 I/F

Yes

Yes

NA

NA

E-Mail

Yes

NA

NA

NA

Configuration Software

SoftMaster-NM

Max. No. of Network Modules

Max. 12 units (High Speed Link Service: 8 units, PTP Service :8 Units)

Diagnostics

Auto Scan, Ping test, Frame Monitor, Link Monitor, Loop back

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

SoftMaster-NM, Sycon

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

81

Precautions

Describe the ML200R Interface Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Precautions for System Configuration:


HS Link Station Number should be unique for every module
Station number of Pnet interface module must be set by the SyCon
Configuration Tool
For an FEnet module, the IP addresses must be unique for all modules in the
network
Use cable that complies with the specifications in the data sheet
If the remote communication cable is connected, keep the cable far away
from the Power line or inductive noise
Improper cable connections (snarled cable, redundant connections) may
cause communication errors
While the power of the module is ON, mounting and dismounting of the
module will cause system errors and the CPU module will halt

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

82

41

Describe the ML200R Interface Modules


2/2/2012

Comparison

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Topic: MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation


Contents
Identify the ML200R System Components ............................................................................................3
Verify the ML200R System Connections ...............................................................................................5

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation


Identify the ML200R System Components

Identify the ML200R System Components


2

Practice
Objective
In this LAB, you will identify the various parts of the ML200R system using a check-off list.

Prerequisites

ML200R Hardware with I/O

Introduction
You will be provided with a checklist which has a list of hardware components used for an
ML200R cabinet. You need to identify the various parts using the checklist.
TIP
Quantities are also important.

Show your instructor your completed checklist, including discrepancies, if any.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation


Identify the ML200R System Components

ML200R EXPERION INTG CPU Rack and IO Parts Check off List
QTY per
cabinet

MODEL NO.

Part
Number

DESCRIPTION

2MLR-AC22

Power Supply for redundant power, 220 VAC,


5.5 Amp

2MLR-CPUH/T

CPU Modules

2MLL-EFMT

FENet, Ethernet Communication Modules

14

2MLT-DMMA

Dummy Module

2MLR-AC23

Power Supply for redundant power, 220 VAC,


8.5 Amp

2MLL-DBSF

Network Slave Module

2MLF-AC8A

Analog Input Module, 8 CH (Current Type)

2MLF-DC4A

DA Conversion Module, AO, 4 Ch

2MLQ-TR4B

DO Transistor Output, 32 points

2MLI-D24A

DI DC 24V Input, 32 points

2MLR-M06P

Base for Module Installation, 6 slot

2MLR-E12P

Base for Module Installation, 12 slot

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Present?

2/2/2012

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation


Verify the ML200R System Connections

Verify the ML200R System Connections


2

Objective
The objective of this LAB is to familiarize the student with the hardware components of the
ML200R Demo Kit.
Prerequisites

ML200R Demo Kit

Introduction
In this lab you will perform the following:

2/2/2012

Observe and Identify the Hardware components of the ML 200 Demo Kit.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation


Verify the ML200R System Connections

Process:
Please check off each item as you complete the task.
Your course instructor may wish to observe you while you perform these tasks.
LEARN BY DOING

Step

Action

Go to ML200R DEMO KIT, and perform the following steps.

Locate the Remote IO Extension Drive Module in the Kit.

Is the TX/RX LED in the IO Extension Drive Module blinking ____?

How many cables are connected in the two ports of the IO Extension Drive
Module______?

What is the number set on the station number switch_____?

Locate the ML200R CPU A Controller Module.

Locate the Operation mode switch on the ML200R PLC.

Is the SYNC cable connected on the ML200R CPU _________?

The IO cable on PORT1 is connected to ________ module, and PORT2 is connected to


________ module.

10

Where is the Reset/D clear switch on the ML200R CPU___?

11

Locate the CPU A and CPU B status LEDs on the ML200R CPU A.

12

Is the ERR LED of ML200R CPU A module ON or OFF ____?

13

If the ERR LED is ON, list the possible reasons.


________________________________
________________________________
________________________________
________________________________
________________________________

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation


Verify the ML200R System Connections
LEARN BY DOING

2/2/2012

Step

Action

14

Identify the Power supply module for the ML200R CPU A.

15

What is the Slot number an Analog Input module ____?

16

What is the Slot number for a Digital Input module____?

17

What is the Slot number for a Digital Output module____?

18

What is the Slot number for an Analog Output module____?

19

What is the Slot number for a Pulse Input module____?

20

What is the Slot number for a RTD module____?

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation


Verify the ML200R System Connections

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Describe SoftMaster Features and Installation

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe SoftMaster Features and Installation


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Introduction
SoftMaster is a tool designed to program and debug the
MasterLogic200R PLC series
Key Features of SoftMaster : Multi-PLC, Multi-Program
Number of PLCs or Programs can be used in SoftMaster
Drag and Drop option
Shortcut keys
Message Windows
Convenient Variable / Comment Editing
Convenient Program Edit
Monitoring Functions
Custom Events
Module Changing Wizard
Able to change Modules while plant is running

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe SoftMaster Features and Installation


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Installation Step 1

Double click on the SoftMaster 3.62 exe file from the CD to start the
installation
Click on the Allow option in the displayed User Account Control (UAC)
window.

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe SoftMaster Features and Installation


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Installation Step 2
Click on the Install button in the displayed window

Click on the Yes button

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe SoftMaster Features and Installation


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Installation Step 3

Enter the User Name


and Company Name

Click on the Next


button to continue

Click on the Next


button to continue

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Describe SoftMaster Features and Installation


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Installation Step 4
Installation path of the
Software is displayed here

Click the Change button to change


the Software Installation path

Click on the Next button to


continue the installation

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Click on the Install button


to Install the Softmaster
3.62 release software

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe SoftMaster Features and Installation


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Installation Step 5

Select Install this driver anyway if windows security message is


displayed.

Click on at the Finish button

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe SoftMaster Features and Installation


4/25/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe SoftMaster Features and Installation


4/25/2012

Describe the MasterLogic Programming


Software

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Introduction
SoftMaster Window consists of

Menu bar and Toolbar


Project Window
Function Window
Variable Monitoring Window
Message window
Program editor

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software


4/25/2012

Honeywell

SoftMaster

Menu bar
and
Toolbar
Groups

Project Window

Main Program Editor


Window

Function Window

Variable Monitoring
Windows

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Message Window
Tabs

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

11

Honeywell

New Project

Used to enter the project


name. The extension of
project file is .xgp

Open a New Project

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software


4/25/2012

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Configuration of Project

Browse to select a
folder to store the
project file

A folder identical to the


project name is created
and the project file is
stored in this folder

Select the
PLC type
Select the
type of CPU

Enter the Name of


the Program included
in a project

Select the programming


language
LD: Ladder Diagram
SFC: Sequential Function
chart
ST: Structured Text

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Enter Project
description

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

13

Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Project

Uploads the Project and


program stored in the PLC
Imports or Exports the File
from the storage location in
the Below Formats

Compares two projects


stored on the PC and
displays its result
Item

plc

Global
Variables/Address

gdv

Program

prg

I/O Parameter

iop

Basic Parameter

bsp

Function/FB

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

14

File Extension

PLC

Fun, src

Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Edit Menu

Optimizes the Program


automatically

Inputs a comment or
label in the cursor
position

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Sets or removes Block


Mask to or from cursorpositioned rung or
specified
block area in rung unit

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

15

Honeywell

Find/ Replace

Finds the desired


Address or Text based
on the type

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software


4/25/2012

Replaces the desired


Address or Text with the
new Device or Text

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

16

Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software


4/25/2012

Honeywell

View for Ladder Diagram Language


Converts to IL View
during the LD Edit

Shows or hides the


Project, Message,
Variable Monitoring, or
the Instruction Window

Displays the
used-memory
information on
the message
windows cross
reference tab

Displays the used


Address information on
the message windows
Used Address tab

Inspects the program for


the Logical, Grammar, and
Duplicate coil error and it
displays the result on the
respective message
windows program tab

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

17

Honeywell

View for Ladder Diagram Language

Displays
variables / Addresses
or the combination as
selected

Open Local Variables:


Opens the list of local
variables

LD Properties
option selects
variables / addresses
or the combination as
selected

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software


4/25/2012

Open User Function:


Opens the Program
window
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

18

Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software


4/25/2012

Honeywell

View for SFC

Opens the
Block/Action/Transition
List

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

19

Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Online Menu
Changes
PLC Mode

Connects to
PLC

Swaps between
Master and Standby
CPU

Specifies the
connection
type and
parameters

Reset PLC: Reboots PLC


Clear PLC: Clears Latch
Area 1,2

PLC System
Logs

Online
Modification

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

20

10

Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Monitor Menu

Start Monitoring: starts to monitor


Pause: Temporarily stops the monitor
Resume: starts from hold point
Pausing Conditions: Specifies
conditions for the monitor
temporary stop

Specifies the device


value being monitored

Executes System, Address, special


Module (A I/O, HSC), Trend and PID
monitoring and SOE Monitoring

Custom Events: Time stamps and logs Events


Data Traces: stores the waveforms in CPU as
configured

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

21

Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software


4/25/2012

Honeywell

SOE Monitoring

SOE Monitoring software is used mainly to monitor the events recorded


by SOE modules and also are useful to save them to an excel file
It provides function that allows the SOE monitoring operation to be
independent of Softmaster
It enables data monitoring and saving
SOE monitoring software communicates with the ML series PLC for
ease and fast operation of the SOE module
Major Functions of SOE:

Read/save event history


Delete event history
View module parameter settings
Save event history to excel file

Files Created in the SOE Monitor:

<File name>.set log file for the event created by the user. Used mainly to
save the event
<File name>.xls module event file created by the user. Used mainly to
save the event record to the excel file

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

22

11

Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software


4/25/2012

Honeywell

SOE Monitoring Window


Open SOE Monitoring software:
Monitor SOE Monitoring

Double click CPU


Event History option
to view the events
saved in CPU

Double click Module


Event History option
to view the events
saved in SOE Module

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Saved events
are displayed
in this area

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

23

Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Debug Menu
Select to start/ stop
debugging

Go: Runs to the break point


Step Over: Runs Step by Step
Step Into: Debugs the subroutine
Step Out: Step out the subroutine block
Go to Cursor: Runs the Cursor position
Set/Remove Breakpoints: Sets or
Cancels the Breakpoint
Breakpoints List: Displays the List
of breakpoints specified
Breakpoint Conditions: Specifies
break conditions

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

24

12

Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Tools Menu
Network Manager: Opens
SoftMaster Network
Manager

Start Simulator: Simulated PLC


for Master Logic PLC Series

Customize: User can customize the Toolbar


Shortcut Settings: Used for Short Key
Assignment
Options: Used to set Color, Font, Display
settings for items shown in Softmaster

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

MasterLogic Software Introduction

25

Honeywell

Ladder Element

Symbol

Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software


4/25/2012

Name

Description

A Contact
(Normally Open)

Input Signal

B Contact
(Normally Closed)

Input Signal

A Contact

B Contact

P Contact
(Positive Transition Sensing)

Input Signal
P Contact

N Contact
(Negative Transition
Sensing)

Input Signal
N Contact

Horizontal Line
Vertical Line
Fill Horizontal line
NOT instruction Contact

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

26

13

Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Ladder Element
Symbol

Name

Description

Normal Coil

Input Signal

P Coil

Input Signal

N Coil

Input Signal

Coil
P

N
S

P Coil

N Coil

Set Coil

Input Signal
S Coil

Function/FB
Extension Function Block
Normally Open OR contact
Normally Close OR Contact

Positive Transition Sensing


OR Contact

Negative Transition Sensing


OR Contact

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

27

Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Status Display

PLC Name: Used to


display the selected
PLC Name.
If several PLCs are
in a project, online
related instructions
are applied to the
PLC displayed here

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Warning Display:
Used to display
the error status in
the PLC

Cursor Position
Display: Used to
display cursor
position while
editing the
program

PLC Mode: Used to


display the PLC
Mode. If several
PLCs are in a
project, the mode of
the selected PLC is
displayed

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

28

14

Program Edit Mode:


Overwrite: Overwrites
the selected contact
point/ function block
with new one
Insert: Inserts new
contact point/function
block by moving
existing contact
point/function block to
the right hand side

Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Project Configuration Window


Project which may
comprises of several PLCs
Global Variable declaration
and direct variable text can
be edited and Viewed

Used to configure Basic


Parameter, I/O parameter,
and Redundancy
parameter

Used as a folder for


all programs
User Defined Task
with fixed cycle
Custom Function/Function
Block created by the user.
Defines
structure type

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

29

Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Function/Function Block
Function / Function
Block are listed here

Recently used
Function / Function
Blocks are listed here

Favorite
Functions / Function
Blocks can be
added in this list
Most frequently used
function blocks can
be listed and viewed
by this selection

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

30

15

Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software


4/25/2012

Single PLC system


with CPU module and
the connection status

Honeywell

Variable Monitoring Window

PLC: Used to display the PLC available for registration. SoftMaster project may
be composed of multi-PLC
Program: Used to select the program name with a variable to register
Variable Name/ Address: Used to enter the name of the variable or address
Value: Used to display applicable address value when monitored
Type: Displays the type of variable
Address/ Variable Name: Selects variable on a list of local variable if the memory
is allocated
Comment: Displays the variable comments

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

31

Honeywell

Message Window

Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software


4/25/2012

Result: Gives information while writing the program and indicates errors and
warnings
Check Program: Checks all programs and indicates errors and warnings
Find 1 and Find 2: Result of Find Address / Find Text is displayed here
Communication: Information like the Date and Time are displayed here
Cross Reference : Gives detailed information about the program
Used Address: Gives details of the parameter
Duplicate Coil: Shows all addresses and the number used in program.
Addresses used in each address area, according to designated types, are
classified into input and output

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

32

16

Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Program Editor
Program Editor is used to edit the program
Program editor uses four languages to edit the program
Instruction List
Ladder Diagram
SFC
ST

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

33

Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software


4/25/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

34

17

Describe the MasterLogic Programming Software


4/25/2012

Describe the Configuration of Basic


Parameters

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

35

Honeywell

Introduction

Describe the Configuration of Basic Parameters


4/25/2012

The Basic parameter settings window is


invoked from the Basic Parameter within
the ML200R project
Basic Parameters can be set in the
following tabs:
Basic Operation Setup
Retain Area Settings
Error Operation Setup

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

36

18

Describe the Configuration of Basic Parameters


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Basic Operation Setup

Output Control settings:


Determines if the data should
be held/released by ML PLC
during these conditions

User is able to
enable/disable the fixed
period operation mode and
set the fixed period for the
program if enabled
Used to configure the
Watch Dog time and
input filter parameter
Configure the PLC
restart mode Cold or
Warm restart mode

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

37

Describe the Configuration of Basic Parameters


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Basic Operation Setup

Used to disable the Reset


and D.CLR switches
present in the CPU
MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

38

19

Describe the Configuration of Basic Parameters


4/25/2012

Honeywell

SOE Parameters in Basic Parameter Settings


SOE Parameters in the Basic Parameter Settings

Allows to save the latest SOE


events. If the events exceeds
the 3000 events, then the
oldest event gets deleted and
the latest event gets saved

Allows to save the initial SOE


events to the CPU. If the events
count exceeds the 3000 events,
then the oldest event is retained
and latest events are ignored

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

39

Describe the Configuration of Basic Parameters


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Retain Area Setup

Parameter RETAIN (%R) is used to retain data values necessary for


operation
Data is retained in warm restart of PLC

User is able to configure part of M area memory as retain memory area


(Max. 128 KB)
Select the M area retain
setting check box option to
enable the M area retain
settings.
Enter the Starting and
Ending M area address to
the Define Retain Memory
area. Unit: MWORDS
0 to 65555

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

40

20

Describe the Configuration of Basic Parameters


4/25/2012

If enabled, the PLC


continues to run even
on the fuse error

If enabled, the PLC


continues to run on I/O
Module error

If enabled, the PLC runs


even if a Communication
Module error occurs

If enabled, the PLC


continues to run even
on Special Module error

If enabled, the PLC runs


even if a Extended base
error occurs

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

41

Describe the Configuration of Basic Parameters


4/25/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

42

21

Describe the Configuration of Basic Parameters


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Error Operation Setup

Describe the Configuration of IO Parameters

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

43

Describe the Configuration of IO Parameters


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

The IO Parameter Setting window is


invoked from the IO Parameter item
within the ML200R PLC project

Components of the IO Parameter


Setting dialog box:
Module Modules configured in the
base
Comments Users Comments
Input Filter Constant filter value for
the input
Emergency Out Output value when
the CPU stops abruptly from RUN
Allocation The allocation is a fixed
type and is always disabled

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

44

22

Describe the Configuration of IO Parameters


4/25/2012

Honeywell

IO Parameter Basics
The I/O Parameter Setting dialog box specifies:
I/O module configuration in the Base Slot location
User configurable parameters for each I/O channel

Slot
Information

Base
Segregation

Module List

Configuration
Settings

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

45

Honeywell

Module Assignment

Base 00 lists the Communications


Modules

Base 01 Base 31 lists all modules,


inclusive of the Communication
Modules, for open connectivity

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Describe the Configuration of IO Parameters


4/25/2012

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

46

23

Describe the Configuration of IO Parameters


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Configuration Options

Delete
selected slot

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

47

Describe the Configuration of IO Parameters


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Configuration Details

Delete Slot

Delete Base

Base Setting

Delete All

Details

Print

OK

Deletes all information of the currently selected slot.


Deletes all information of the currently selected base.
Sets the base number of the currently selected base.
Deletes the configured module and information of all bases.
Displays detailed module information.
Prints the module type and the modules parameter information specified in the slot.
Applies the changed items and closes the dialog box.

Cancel
Closes the dialog box.

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

48

24

Describe the Configuration of IO Parameters


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Detail Settings for Digital Input and Output module

Digital Input Module


Specifies the filter constant
value for Digital Inputs
Input filter maintains the input
signal for the filtering time after
the input changes

Digital Output Module

Detail Settings
for Digital Input
Module

Emergency Output Setting


specifies the output when the
CPU abruptly stops during RUN
The Emergency Output mode
can be specified on a per
channel basis

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Detail Settings
for Digital Output
Module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

49

Describe the Configuration of IO Parameters


4/25/2012

Detail Settings for Analog Input and Output module

Honeywell

Analog Input / Output Module


Details all the channels applicable
parameter values
When a parameter value is changed
by a user from the default value, the
value string color changes from
Black to Blue
Detail Settings for
Analog Output
Module

Detail Settings
for Analog Input
Module

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

50

25

Describe the Configuration of IO Parameters


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Detail Settings High Speed Counter Modules

High Speed Counter Modules


Details all the channels applicable parameter values
When a parameter value is changed by a user from the default value, the
value string color changes from Black to Blue

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

51

Detail Settings Temperature Measuring Modules

Describe the Configuration of IO Parameters


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Temperature Measuring Modules


Details all the channels applicable parameter values
When a parameter value is changed by a user from the default value, the value string
color changes from Black to Blue

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

52

26

Describe the Configuration of IO Parameters


4/25/2012

Describe the Configuration of Redundancy


Parameters

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

53

Describe the Configuration of Redundancy Parameters


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

The Redundancy Parameter window is invoked from the Projects Window of


SoftMaster.
Redundancy Parameter is the redundancy settings for the ML200R CPU.
Double-click the Redundancy Parameter
option in the Project Window to open the
Redundancy Parameter window

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

54

27

Describe the Configuration of Redundancy Parameters


4/25/2012

Redundancy Parameters Configuration

Honeywell

Redundancy Parameters Configuration


is used to configure the redundancy
operation of the system. It has two tabs
for configuration
Basic Operation Setup
FEnet I/F Operation Setup

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

55

Describe the Configuration of Redundancy Parameters


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Hot Swapping Option

Hot Swapping: Used to replace the faulty Base or module in the online
mode
Base:
When selected, the Base can be replaced online without using the Base
Changing Wizard in SoftMaster
Module:
Module can be replaced online without using the Module Changing
Wizard in SoftMaster
Module Detachment Error does Not appear while replacing the module
Note: If these options are not selected, then the user has to use the
Base/Module Changing Wizard option present in the Softmaster to change
the module or Base

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

56

28

Describe the Configuration of Redundancy Parameters


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Extended Base Power Failure Setup


Restart and Wait

If both the Power supply modules of the Extended base is failed, the CPU
restarts automatically and waits for error rectification
If both the Power supply modules of the Extended base is failed, the CPU
enters into the error state
User has to restart the CPU manually after error rectification

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

57

Honeywell

Warning Options

Describe the Configuration of Redundancy Parameters


4/25/2012

Disable Warning for Single Power


Operation
When selected, the warning message is
Not generated when one of the power
modules in the expansion base is failed or
turned Off

Disable Warning for Ring Topology


When selected, the warning message is
Not generated when Ring topology in a
system is failed or broken

Disable Warning message for Single CPU


Mode
When selected, the warning message is
Not generated when the Master CPU is
operating without a standby CPU

All options are


unchecked by default

Disable warning for fault mask removal


When selected, the warning message is
Not generated when the fault mask is
removed

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

58

29

Describe the Configuration of Redundancy Parameters


4/25/2012

Base Power Failure Error

Honeywell

Redundancy Synchronization Area


Defines the Start and End
memory locations for
synchronization
If the Used checkbox is
enabled, then the data in
the selected area is
synchronized between the
Master and Standby CPU

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

59

Describe the Configuration of Redundancy Parameters


4/25/2012

Honeywell

FENet I/F Operation Setup

Switching Condition: Configures the switching behavior of the system


when the FENet cable is disconnected
Disconnection of the Cable: Master/Standby switchover happens
immediately within 1 sec, if this option is selected and FENet cable is
disconnected.
Disconnection of the Server Connection: Master/Standby Switchover
happens with some delay after the removal of the FENet cable
Note: For Switchover, it requires a healthy Server connection before the
removal of cable or cable break

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

60

30

Describe the Configuration of Redundancy Parameters


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Automatic Switchover Option

Select the check box option for Automatic Switchover (Redundancy


operation)
Group the FENet modules installed on the main base to the same or
different groups

Pre-requisites for Automatic master Switchover:


All cables of FENet modules in a group are disconnected
At least one FENet module corresponding to same group in the standby
base should be running under normal condition

If these conditions are satisfied, then only the automatic master


Switchover will happen

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

61

Describe the Configuration of Redundancy Parameters


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Automatic Switchover (Redundancy Operation)


Max. 6 groups can be configured.

Max. 6 groups can


be configured

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

62

31

Describe the Configuration of Redundancy Parameters


4/25/2012

This option is used to set the condition for the Automatic Master
Switchover Operation
Steps to configure the Automatic Master Switchover:

Describe the Basics of Project

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

63

Describe the Basics of Project


4/25/2012

Honeywell

SoftMaster Project Window


Components of the SoftMaster Project Window

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

64

32

Describe the Basics of Project


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Select PLC Type

Enter a name for


the ML200R PLC

Select the
PLC type

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

65

Describe the Basics of Project


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Basic Parameter Settings

Basic parameters related to the PLC operation are defined in Basic


parameter settings
Example: Watchdog timer, Restart Mode, Fixed Period Operation, etc.

Right click on
Basic Parameter
and select Open

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

66

33

Describe the Basics of Project


4/25/2012

Right-click on the
ML200R PLC and
select Properties

Honeywell

I/O Parameter Setting

ML200R PLC I/O modules are configured in I/O Parameter Settings in


the base and slot number positions
Types: Communication Modules, Special Modules and Digital Modules
Define settings for each channel of I/O Modules

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

67

Describe the Basics of Project


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Redundancy Parameter
Set redundancy-related parameters
Warning Options
Redundancy synchronization areas

Double click on
Redundancy Parameter
to open the Redundancy
Parameter window

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

68

34

Describe the Basics of Project


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Scan Program

All programs defined for the ML200R PLC are located under the Scan
Program item in the Project Window
Each program contains Local Variables and a Program

To add a program, right-click


on Scan Program and select
Add Item > Program

Enter the program name


and programming
language to be used

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

69

Describe the Basics of Project


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Programming Languages
Ladder Diagram
Sequential Function Chart (SFC)
Structured Text (ST)
Ladder Diagram

Structured Text

Sequential
Function Chart

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

70

35

Describe the Basics of Project


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Global Variable/Addresses

Global Variables are available for use in every program defined in a


project
Global Variables contain information regarding Special Modules

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Basics of Project


4/25/2012

71

Honeywell

Variables in Global Variables List

After adding a Special Module to the I/O Parameter list, the Special
Modules specific parameters are updated/registered in the Global
Variables List
Add a Special Module to
the I/O Parameter List

Select All Check


Box option or
select checkbox
against required
bases

Click OK

Click OK

MasterLogic Software Introduction

2
Click Yes

Special Module parameters


get registered in the Global
Variable list

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

72

36

Describe the Basics of Project


4/25/2012

Honeywell
Variables in Global Variable List
If Special Module parameters are not registered automatically to the
Global Variable list they can be added manually
Click Edit Register Special Module Variables

Special Module parameters get


registered in the Global Variable list

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

73

Describe the Basics of Project


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Local Variables

Local Variables are available for use only with their associated Program
under the Scan Program item in which they are declared

Local Variables defined for the Ladder Program


can be used for configuration only in that
particular program

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

74

37

Describe the Basics of Project


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Copy Global Variables to Local Variables

To use a Global Variable as a Local Variable, it must be added to the Local


Variable list
In the Local Variables window, right click and select Add EXTERNAL variable
The Add EXTERNAL Variable option is also available in the Edit menu in SoftMaster
Global Variables get
added to the Local
Variable list

Select the variables to be added


or click Select All to select all
Global Variables and click OK

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

75

Describe the Basics of Project


4/25/2012

Honeywell

User Data Types

Users can create new data types to be used in the Program file

Right click on the User


Data Type and select
Add Item > Data type

Enter a Name
and Comment for
the data type

Define the Variables


for the data type

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

76

38

Describe the Basics of Project


4/25/2012

Honeywell

User Data Type


Use of the data type in a Program

To use the data type in


a Program, define a
variable in the Local
Variables

Use the data type


in a Program
MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

77

Describe the Basics of Project


4/25/2012

Honeywell

User Functions

Users can define Functions/Function Blocks to be used in a Program


Each user-defined function contains Local Variables and a Program
Create the Function

Use the Function

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

78

39

Describe the Basics of Project


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Function / Function Block

Basic Structure

Power in
(Enabling F/FB)

Input
items

# of INPUTS

EN

ENO

IN1

OUT1

IN2

OUT2

IN3

OUT3

Power out or
F/FB Execution
Result
Output/Result
items

Function

Function Block

One or more

One or more

# of OUTPUTS

Only One

One or more

Execution

Completed within 1 scan

Completed within 1 or more scan

Instruction
examples

MOV/BCDADD/SUB/MUL/DIV/EQ
/GT/GE/LT/LE etc

TON (On-delay Timer)


CTU (Counter) etc

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Describe the Basics of Project


4/25/2012

79

Honeywell

Function / Function Block


Circuit Connection Conventions
Correct Circuit
%QX0.1.0

%IX0.0.0

Wrong Circuit
%QX0.1.0

%IX0.0.0

%QX0.1.0

%IX0.0.0

%IX0.0.0

%QX0.1.0
%QX0.1.1
%MW3
%MX0

F/FB

%QX0.1.1

%MW3

%MW10

%MX0

%IX0.0.1

F/FB

%QX0.1.1
%MW3
%MX0
%IX0.0.1

%MW10

%IX0.0.1

F/FB

Coil contact cannot


be connected to a
non-electric output

MasterLogic Software Introduction

%QX0.1.1

%MW3

%MW10

%MX0
%IX0.0.1

F/FB

%MW10

Normally Open contact


cannot be connected to
a non-electric input

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

80

40

Describe the Basics of Project


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Function Block in a Program

Open the Program from the Scan Program item in the Project Window

Configure the variables in the Local Variable list


Select the Function Block from the window and insert it in a Program

2
3

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

81

Describe the Basics of Project


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Task

A Task is a PLC program that


executes only when the specific
execution conditions occur

Runs once to
set variables

A Task program does not


reiteratively process like a PLC
Scan Program

Scan Program

Runs
periodically

Initial Task

There are two types of Task


Programs:

Cyclic Task
Internal Task

Time-driven Interrupt Task


program
Executes on a preset
periodic basis
Internal Device Interrupt Task
program
Executes when a preset
condition is true

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Executes when
condition is true

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

82

41

Describe the Basics of Project


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Task Processing
Power ON
Initial Task
(INI)
Input Refresh
Program 1

Executes
periodically

Cyclic Task
(TIME)

Program 2
Condition
ON !!

Internal Task
(INTERNAL)

Program 3

Output Refresh
End Processing

Item
Prog
ram

# of Task

Execution Condition

Remarks

256
Task

At every scan

Each program is executed


in sequence of registration

Initial

At initial state

Cyclic

32

At every cycle time

Internal

32

On Internal Condition is TRUE

Scan Program
Task
Prog
ram

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

83

Describe the Basics of Project


4/25/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

84

42

Describe the Basics of Project


4/25/2012

Describe simulation in SoftMaster

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

85

Describe simulation in SoftMaster


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Introduction
SoftMaster - SIM is
available with SoftMaster
Using SoftMaster - SIM
Programs can run
without a physical
ML200R PLC
Programs can be
debugged using
input condition
settings or module
simulation functions

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

86

43

Describe simulation in SoftMaster


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Functions Supported by SoftMaster - SIM


SoftMaster SIM supports

Program Simulation
Simulation of programs such as LD/SFC/ST written in SoftMaster
Online editing and debugging
PLC Online Functions
Program monitoring and online diagnostics functions such as system
monitoring, address monitoring, trend monitoring, data trace and custom
events
Module Simulation
Simulation for various I/O modules such as Digital I/O, A/D Conversion,
D/A Conversion, Counter, Temperature Control, and Positioning
Input value of each module can be set through simulation
I/O Input Condition Settings
Set data values in a program when a specific condition is met
Set data values once/continuously
Used to test PLC programs

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

87

Describe simulation in SoftMaster


4/25/2012

Honeywell

System Requirements for SoftMaster - SIM


Minimum system requirements to run SoftMaster - SIM
Pentium 3 900MHz, RAM 256MB

Recommended system requirements to run SoftMaster - SIM


Pentium 4 1.5GHz, RAM 512MB (or more)

Disconnection may occur in the following cases:


When using a system with minimum specification to run SoftMaster - SIM
Fixed period scan may not operate properly because the scan period
may be longer than the fixed period
If the system is configured to use Sleep mode
If the system load is heavy

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

88

44

Describe simulation in SoftMaster


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Launch and Start SoftMaster - SIM

Open the ML200R program to be run in simulation mode in SoftMaster

Select Tools Start Simulator

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

89

Describe simulation in SoftMaster


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Launch and Start SoftMaster - SIM

Select OK in the Write


window to download the
program into SoftMaster
SIM for simulation

Representation of the
SoftMaster SIM PLC

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

90

45

Describe simulation in SoftMaster


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Basic View of SoftMaster - SIM


SoftMaster - SIM window

Modules:
BX stands for base number;
SXX stands for slot number

Change channel values


Specify I/O conditions

Single and
Continuous
I/O conditions

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

91

Describe simulation in SoftMaster


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Open I/O Module in SoftMaster SIM

I/O defined in the program


automatically appear in
SoftMaster SIM.
Right-click and select
Open Item

To view/change the
Channel Value, select the
Start/Termination of the
Channel Monitor Button
Change
Values

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

92

46

Describe simulation in SoftMaster


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Change Values from SoftMaster SIM

Change the I/O values in the program


by changing the associated Channel
Value from SoftMaster - SIM

Double-click on the
Channel Value

Click OK to
change the value

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

93

Describe simulation in SoftMaster


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Change Values from SoftMaster SIM


Value changes in
the program and
the logic runs

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

94

47

Describe simulation in SoftMaster


4/25/2012

Change the program to


Run mode in SoftMaster

Honeywell

Single I/O Condition

Basic Setting tab


Double-click a Condition channel to open the condition settings dialog box
Enter Name and Description of the condition
Execution Options
Always execute: regardless of the condition set, the output is
executed on start
Execute by button: executes the output setting by pressing a button
Execute by condition expression: execute the output setting when a
specific condition is satisfied

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

95

Describe simulation in SoftMaster


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Single I/O Condition


Output Setting tab
Set the address/channel number and
the value to be set when the input
condition is executed
Use the View Channel Browser
button to set the output address

Select the button Application /


Cancellation of a single I/O condition to
apply/disable the I/O condition
If the execute option Execute
by button is used, an Action
button appears. When this
button is clicked, the
condition is executed
I/O Condition is
grayed out and is not
available for editing

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

96

48

Describe simulation in SoftMaster


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Continuous I/O Condition


Basic Setting
Similar to Single I/O Condition Basic Setting

Output Setting

Repeated Execution
Ignore Condition while execution

Click here to select


Channel Address
Enter values to be
continuously sent to channel.
Up to 199 values can be set

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Describe simulation in SoftMaster


4/25/2012

97

Honeywell

Continuous I/O Condition Settings


Continuous Value Number

Value

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

No.

Execute Option

Ignore Condition
While Execution

Repeated
Execution

Result

Execute by button or Execute by


condition (expression is false)

Not Set

Not Set

Only the first value 10 will be


written 7 times

Always Execute or Execute by


condition (expression is true)

Not Set

Not Set

Values will be continuously


written as 10 20 30 40
50 60 70

Always Execute or Execute by


condition (expression is true)

Set

Not Set

Values will be written as 10


20 30 40 50 60
70

Execute by button or Execute by


condition (expression is false)

Not Set

Set

Values will be continuously


written as 10 10 10 10
10 10 10 10...

Always Execute or Execute by


condition (expression is true)

Not Set

Set

Values will be continuously set


as 10 20 30 40 50
60 7010 20 30
40 50 60 70.

Always Execute or Execute by


condition (expression is true)

Set

Set

Values will be continuously set


as 10 20 30 40 50
60 7010 20 30
40 50 60 70.

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

98

49

Describe simulation in SoftMaster


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Continuous I/O Condition


Select the button
Application/Cancellation of continuous I/O
condition to apply/disable the continuous I/O condition

I/O condition is
grayed out and is not
available for editing

MasterLogic Software Introduction

If the execute option Execute by button is


used, an Action button appears. When this
button is clicked, the condition is executed

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

99

Describe simulation in SoftMaster


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Save I/O Conditions

I/O conditions configured in SoftMaster - SIM need to be saved before


exiting SoftMaster - SIM
Select File Save I/O Condition As
Select a location, enter a file name and save with an .xic extension

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

100

50

Describe simulation in SoftMaster


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Limitations of SoftMaster - SIM

SoftMaster - SIM can be used to simulate only a non-redundant ML200


PLC and not a redundant ML200R PLC

SoftMaster - SIM doesnt support functions related to Communication


Modules

In a physical ML200R PLC a watchdog timer can be set to prevent


errors
In SoftMaster - SIM, watchdog timer does not work since scan time in
SoftMaster - SIM is longer than in a physical ML PLC

SoftMaster - SIM does not support all I/O modules defined in SoftMaster
For more details refer to the SoftMaster User's Guide

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

101

Describe simulation in SoftMaster


4/25/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

MasterLogic Software Introduction

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

102

51

Describe simulation in SoftMaster


4/25/2012

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Topic: MasterLogic Software Introduction


Contents

Configure ML200R using SoftMaster ....................................................................................................3

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Software Introduction


Configure ML200R using SoftMaster

Configure ML200R using SoftMaster


Practice
Objective

The objective of this LAB is to demonstrate the creation and simulation of logic in the ML200R
PLC.
Prerequisites
Experion Server or Client machine with Experion Engineering Tools loaded on it.
Introduction
In this lab, you will perform the following:

Create a new project

Add a CPU, Digital Input, and Digital Output

Configure a Rack, CPU, Input and Output

Create Ladder logic

Simulate the logic using the SoftMaster Simulator

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

MasterLogic Software Introduction


Configure ML200R using SoftMaster

Step

Action

Open SoftMaster from Start All Programs SoftMaster SoftMaster

Select New Project from the Project Menu.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Software Introduction


Configure ML200R using SoftMaster

Step
3

Action
Enter the details of the new Project as shown:
Project Name: ConfigureDIO
File directory: Default
PLC Series: ML-200R
Program name: DIO_Simulation

Leave all other settings at their default values.


Click OK.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

MasterLogic Software Introduction


Configure ML200R using SoftMaster

Step
4

Action
Right-click on I/O Parameter under the new PLC project > Parameter.
Select Open.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Software Introduction


Configure ML200R using SoftMaster

Step

The I/O Parameter Setting dialog box opens. No I/O modules will be configured on
Base 00.

Action

ATTENTION
In actual hardware, all communication modules would
be configured on Base 00.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

MasterLogic Software Introduction


Configure ML200R using SoftMaster

Step
6

Action
Open/expand Base 01.
In Slot 0, click the Module drop-down box. Expand Digital Module List Input module
and double click on DC 24V INPUT, 32points

ATTENTION
To add a module, double-click on the module.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Software Introduction


Configure ML200R using SoftMaster

Step

In Slot 1, click the Module drop-down box. Expand Digital Module List Output
Module and double click on TR OUTPUT, 32points

Action

Click OK.
8

Now we will create the first Ladder Rung.


Select a Normally Open Contact (F3)
Column 0 in the Program window.

4/25/2012

from the LD Toolbar and click on Row 0,

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

MasterLogic Software Introduction


Configure ML200R using SoftMaster

Step
9

Action
The Select Variable dialog box opens. Enter the following:
Variable: START.
Variable List Type: Local Variable
Leave the rest of the values as default.

Click OK.

10

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Software Introduction


Configure ML200R using SoftMaster

Step
10

Action
This opens the Variable Name Add dialog box. Enter the following;

Address: %IX1.0.0

Click OK in the Variable Name Add dialog boxes and in the Select Variable dialog
boxes.

ATTENTION
This address indicates that the variable is of the type
Input, located at Base 01, Slot 00. The last zero
indicates the Channel number of the Digital Input.
If the Address is not set, the variable will be saved
automatically in the symbolic area (%A).

11
From the SoftMaster LD Toolbar, select a Coil (F9)
window.

4/25/2012

and click in the Program

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

11

MasterLogic Software Introduction


Configure ML200R using SoftMaster

Step
12

Action
In the Select Variable dialog box, enter the following:
Variable Name: RELAY
Variable List Type: Local Variable
Leave the rest of the values as default.

Click OK.

12

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Software Introduction


Configure ML200R using SoftMaster

Step
13

Action
Enter the following in the Variable Name Add dialog box:

Address: %QX1.1.0

Click OK in the Variable Name Add and the Select Variable dialog boxes.
ATTENTION
This address indicates that the variable is of type
Output, located at Base 01, Slot 01. The last zero
indicates the Channel number of the Digital Output.
If the Address is not set, the variable will be saved
automatically in the symbolic area (%A).

14

4/25/2012

This completes the first Rung of the Ladder Program. This program will be executed in
the simulator.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

13

MasterLogic Software Introduction


Configure ML200R using SoftMaster

Step

Action

15

Click View Check Program.

16

Keep all default selections in the Program Check dialog box.

Click OK.

14

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Software Introduction


Configure ML200R using SoftMaster

Step

View the Program results in the Check Program tab Message Window.

17

Action

ATTENTION
Steps 15, 16, 17 are not required in a simulation
environment because the program is automatically
executed.
18

4/25/2012

In the SoftMaster window, click Tools Start Simulator.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

15

MasterLogic Software Introduction


Configure ML200R using SoftMaster

Step
19

Action
The SoftMaster-SIM window opens. The Write dialog-box opens (may take a few
seconds)

Click OK on the Write dialog-box.


ATTENTION
The Write dialog box is visible after the SoftMasterSIM window opens completely.
A Warning message may occur indicating Invalid
configuration of redundancy System and a Fault Mask
Error. Ignore this warning message by clicking Close
on the Error/ Warning- New PLC Dialog box.
20

16

Click OK to acknowledge the Write completion.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Software Introduction


Configure ML200R using SoftMaster
Step

Action

21

In the SoftMaster window, select Online Change Mode Run.

22

Click Yes in response to Change to Run mode?

23

Open the SoftMaster-SIM window if not already open (See System Tray if not in on Task
Bar)

In the Channel List, double click on the Digital Input Module located in Base 01 Slot 00
(B1S00: DC24V Input 8-Point)

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

17

MasterLogic Software Introduction


Configure ML200R using SoftMaster

18

Step

Action

24

In the SoftMaster-SIM window, select Tools Start Channel Monitoring.

25

Online Digital Input values will be displayed in Red under the Channel Value heading.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Software Introduction


Configure ML200R using SoftMaster
Step

Action

26

Double click on the Channel Value of Channel No 1 (B1S00.IN00) to invoke the Channel
Value Modification dialog box.

Change the state of Digital Input to ON and click OK.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

19

MasterLogic Software Introduction


Configure ML200R using SoftMaster

20

Step

Action

27

Observe that the Normally Open Contact in the Ladder diagram is now closed.

28

Once the logic is checked using the simulator, select Tools Stop Simulator.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Software Introduction


Configure ML200R using SoftMaster

Step

Action

Download Program to Controller


29

In SoftMaster, select Online Connection Settings

30

In Online Settings, select USB

Click Connect

31

SoftMaster gets connected to PLC

32

Select the Online Write option


Keep the default selection. Click OK

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

21

MasterLogic Software Introduction


Configure ML200R using SoftMaster

Step

Action

33

If this message appears, select Yes

34

Once writing is complete, the following message will appear.


Click Yes

ATTENTION
You may see Module Mismatch error if the I/O
modules defined in I/O parameters does not match
with the actual modules in base.
You will see Fault Mask Remove warning as Fault
mask is not set for I/O modules in class.

22

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

Describe the Import/Export Option

Additional MasterLogic Software Options

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Import/Export Option


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

PLC and Project items can be exported from or imported in to a Project in


SoftMaster.

Export / Import functionality is implemented for backup purposes.

Additional MasterLogic Software Options

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Import/Export Option


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Import/Export Item File Extensions

The following items can be exported from / imported in to SoftMaster:

PLC
Global Variables / Address
Basic Parameter
I/O Parameter
Program
User Function / Function Block

Item

File Extension

PLC

plc

Global Variables / Address

gdv

Basic Parameter

bsp

I/O Parameter

iop

Program

pri

User Function / Function Block

fun

Additional MasterLogic Software Options

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Import/Export Option


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Export File

Select an item in the Project window, then

Right-click on item in the Project and select, Export to File

Select the Project menu in SoftMaster and click the Export to File option

Additional MasterLogic Software Options

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Import/Export Option


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Import File

Select the Project menu in SoftMaster, and select the Import Item from
File option
Then select the item to be imported

Right-click on an item in the Project and select, Import from File

Then select the item to be imported

Additional MasterLogic Software Options

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Import/Export Option


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Import Considerations
Importing is retrieving items from saved files

On Import -- Global Variable/Address, Basic parameter, I/O parameter,


Program, and User Function / Function Blocks will overwrite previous items
On overwrite -- the contents of the existing item is deleted

Additional MasterLogic Software Options

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Import/Export Option


2/2/2012

Describe the Compare Project Option

Additional MasterLogic Software Options

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Compare Project Option


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

Two SoftMaster projects can be compared to view differences with


respect to specific items in the project

Project
being edited

Additional MasterLogic Software Options

Project for
comparison

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Compare Project Option


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Open Compare Projects Window

With the original project open in SoftMaster


Select Project Compare Projects from the menu bar

In the Compare Projects window that appears, click the Open Project button

Browse to open the project file to be compared with the current project

Project
being edited

Additional MasterLogic Software Options

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the Compare Project Option


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Compare Projects
Click the Compare button

Project comparison results are


displayed in the Result tab of
the Message Window

Additional MasterLogic Software Options

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Describe the Compare Project Option


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Comparison Results

Results of compared projects are listed in the Result tab in Message


Window

Additional MasterLogic Software Options

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

11

Describe the Compare Project Option


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Compare Projects With Different Items


Items to be compared should be available in both the projects

Additional MasterLogic Software Options

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

Describe the Compare Project Option


2/2/2012

Describe the System Requirements of Other


Software

Additional MasterLogic Software Options

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

13

Describe the System Requirements of Other Software


2/2/2012

Honeywell

System Requirements for SyCon

SyCon Software is required for configuring Profibus-DP and DeviceNet


modules in the ML200R PLC
System Requirement for SyCon:
PC with Pentium processor or higher
OS: Windows 95 / 98 / NT / 2000 / XP
Free disk space: Minimum 10 MB
RAM: Minimum 16 MB
Graphic resolution: 800 x 600 pixel or higher

Additional MasterLogic Software Options

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

14

Describe the System Requirements of Other Software


2/2/2012

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the different Programming Languages


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

ML200R supports the following IEC (International Electro-technical


Commission) 61131-3 Programming Languages:
Ladder Diagram (LD)
Graphical language based on ladder logic
Sequential Function Chart (SFC)
Logic is implemented in the form of steps (actions) and transitions
(conditions)
Structured Text (ST)
Instruction List (IL)

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the different Programming Languages


4/25/2012

Describe the different Programming


Languages

Honeywell

Ladder Diagram
An IEC 61131-3 Standard Programming Language
Used to create logic for relay, timer and counter operations
User-friendly graphical editor for creating ladder diagrams

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the different Programming Languages


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Ladder Diagram - Edit Tools

Editing
Toolbar

Programming area

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the different Programming Languages


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Ladder Diagram - Example


Ladder Diagram Components
Function
Block

Function

Horizontal
Link

Rung

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Contact

Vertical Link

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Jump Label

Describe the different Programming Languages


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Ladder Diagram Components


Bus Line

A Bus Line is a power line vertically placed on both sides of a ladder


diagram
Every ladder diagram must contain bus lines
Two types
Left Bus Line
Value is always 1

Right Bus Line


Value is not fixed

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the different Programming Languages


4/25/2012

Bus Line

Honeywell

Ladder Diagram Components

Link

Horizontal Link
Used to connect components horizontally
Transmits the signal from the left side to the right side
Vertical Link
Used to connect components vertically
Performs a logical OR function of two horizontal links which are connected using
a vertical link

Contact

A contact operates like an electric switch and transmits a signal over a horizontal link
Two types
Normally Open (NO)
Normally Closed (NC)

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the different Programming Languages


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Ladder Diagram Components


Coil

Stores the value of the signal on the left side of a horizontal link
Acts like an output device
Two types
Momentary
When the left side horizontal link is ON, the coil stores ON
momentarily
NO

NC

Latched
Set
Reset
When the left side horizontal link is ON, the coil stores ON until
reseted by a reset coil

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the different Programming Languages


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Ladder Diagram Components


Functions and Function Blocks

Operations like swap, select, type convert, etc. are pre-defined and available
as directly usable functions
Pre-defined function blocks are provided for counting and timing operations
Users can create custom functions / function blocks based on requirements

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the different Programming Languages


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Ladder Diagram - Monitoring


Coil in OFF
state

Contact in
OFF state

Contact in
ON state

Coil in ON
state

Note: Refer reference section in the course for more


information on Ladder Diagram Programming
MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Describe the different Programming Languages


4/25/2012

Note: Refer reference section in the course for more


information on Function Blocks

Honeywell

Sequential Function Chart (SFC)


An IEC 61131-3 Standard Programming Language
Suitable for batch applications

Used to control the execution sequence of other programs like LD, IL


etc.

SFC
Toolbar

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

11

Sequential Function Chart - Example


Sequential Function Chart Components
Initial Step

Describe the different Programming Languages


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Action

Action
Qualifiers

Transition

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

Describe the different Programming Languages


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Sequential Control Chart - Components


Step
When a step is active, the actions connected to it get executed
One step can have a maximum of 2 actions
A step without action is considered a waiting step

Transition

Conditional expression between two steps


Transition condition is in the form of a Ladder Diagram or Instruction List
The result of a transition condition must always be in BOOL (Boolean) form
In the example shown below, step S2 is executed when TRANS coil
becomes active (1)
TRANS is an internally declared variable

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

13

Sequential Control Chart - Components

Describe the different Programming Languages


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Steps and transitions


can be associated
with Boolean
variables

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

14

Describe the different Programming Languages


4/25/2012

TRAN1

Honeywell

Sequential Control Chart - Components


Action

Action takes the form of PLC language: Ladder Diagram, Instruction List etc.
Action qualifiers are used to control the Action
In the example shown below, when S1 is activated:
Action 1 gets executed
Action 2 gets executed even if S1 is inactivated
It stops the execution only when an action with an R qualifier is
executed

Action1

Action qualifiers
N: Not Stored
S: Stored
Action2

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

15

Describe the different Programming Languages


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Sequential Control Chart - Action Qualifiers


Every action is associated with an Action qualifier
Action qualifiers:

Decide the starting point to execute the action


Decide the time at which the action is executed

SFC consists of the following action qualifiers:

N (Not stored)
S (Set)
R (Reset)
L (Time limited)
D (Time delayed)
P (Pulse)
SD (Stored and Time delayed)
DS (Delayed and Stored)
SL (Stored and Time limited)

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

16

Describe the different Programming Languages


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Sequential Function Chart - Monitoring

Active
Action

Active Step

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

17

Describe the different Programming Languages


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Structured Text (ST)


An IEC 61131-3 Standard Programming Language
Reduces engineering and is easy to understand

Generally used for creating user-defined functions/function blocks


Compatible with other IEC languages

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

18

Describe the different Programming Languages


4/25/2012

Details of the
Action in Ladder
diagram form

Honeywell

Structured Text - Example


Syntax Coloring

Break
points

Auto tabular
(indentation)
Monitoring Window
Split View
Bookmarker

Tool tip
Support
Auto
Identifier

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

19

Describe the different Programming Languages


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Structured Text - Monitoring


The values of variables can
be changed and the program
tested

Online mode

Offline mode
MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

20

10

Describe the different Programming Languages


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Instruction List (IL)


An IEC 61131-3 Standard Programming Language
A mnemonic programming language
View-only mode

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

21

Describe the different Programming Languages


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Instruction List

Click to open
Instruction List

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

22

11

Describe the different Programming Languages


4/25/2012

Programs written in LD can be viewed in IL

Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

23

Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Introduction
Control logic can be implemented using

Ladder Diagrams
Structured Text
Sequential Function Charts
Programs added as a sub-routine written in Ladder Diagram or
Structured Text

Example: How to implement a PID Control Loop using Ladder Diagrams


and Function Blocks

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

24

12

Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement


4/25/2012

Honeywell

PID Control LOOP

User

CPU

MV_Manual

User

Manual
SV (SP)
PV

MV

PID
Operation

Auto
MV(PV)

DA
Conversion
Module
AD
Conversion
Module

Driver

Object
Control

Sense

(Process sensor)

Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) Control is implemented in the


ML200R CPU as a LOOP
A LOOP is a collection of the following Objects:
A sensor detecting the current state of an object to control (PV)
A control operation (PID Control)
A driver to drive the object according to the output (Control Signal)

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

25

Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement


4/25/2012

Honeywell

PID Closed Loop - Example


Use a single ProportionalIntegration-Derivative (PID)
Block to control the system
Input from a Water Level sensor
connected to an Analog Input
Module (2MLF-AV8A)
Input configured at Base-01,
Slot-1, Channel-3

Control System

2MLF-AV8A

2MLF-DV4A

Output to a Pump connected to


an Analog Output Module
(2MLF-DV4A)
Output configured at Base01, Slot-3, Channel-2

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

26

13

Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement


4/25/2012

A maximum of 256 loops (32 LOOPS in 8 BLOCKS) can be created in


the ML200R CPU

Honeywell

Analog Input Module Settings

Add Analog Input


and Analog Output
Modules at Base 01

I/O Parameter Setting dialog box is invoked from the Project Window
Input and Output Modules to be used for PID control in the Program are configured in
the I/O Parameter Setting dialog box

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

27

Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Analog Input/Output Module Setting


Analog Input
Module settings

Enable channel
and configure
channel settings

Analog Output
Module settings

Channel-3 of the Analog Input Module is enabled and the channel


parameters are configured
Channel-2 of the Analog Output Module is enabled and the channel
parameters are configured
MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

28

14

Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Add Information to Global Variables


Global Variables contain information for Special Modules

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

29

Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Global Variables

If changes are made to the parameters which are part of the Global
Variables, the changed parameters are overwritten
No user-defined data in the Global Variables is deleted

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

30

15

Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement


4/25/2012

Once Global Variables are defined in a SoftMaster Project, they can be


used in different programs defined in the project
Analog Input and Analog Output modules
belong to the Special Module List

Honeywell

Copy Global Variables to Local Variables

PID Configuration requires all Analog parameters to be available in the


Local Variables of a Ladder Program
Copy all variables from the Global Variables list to the Local Variables list
Right-click on Local Variable and select Add External Variable
Click Select All and Click OK
Local
Variables List

Global
Variables list

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

MasterLogic Programming Languages

31

Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Add PID Function Block


Add a PID Function Block to the program

Enter the Name


PIDRUN and
click Search

Select the List


Type of Function
Block

Select the Category


Control/Detection

Enter Instance
Name

View Function
Information

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Click OK

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

32

16

Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Add PID Function Block (Contd.)

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

33

Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Add Move Function Blocks


Similarly add two MOVE
Function Blocks to the program
The Move Function Block
moves data connected to an
IN Parameter to an Out
Parameter
In this example, the MOVE
Function is used to transfer
physical IO values to Loop
Inputs-Outputs

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

34

17

Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement


4/25/2012

Assign a Variable Name and select the type as Local Variable. Click OK

Honeywell

Configure Block and Loop Number


Block Number and Loop Number help to
identify the PID Block in PID Monitoring

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

35

Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Make Connections
Configure the Addresses / Parameters on the Function Blocks
Connect IN of the Move
Function Block to the data
variable of I/O Module 1
Channel 3

Connect OUT of the Move


Function Block to the PV of
the PID Block

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

36

18

Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Make Connections

Similarly, configure connections from the PID Block to the Move


Function Block and download the program to the ML200R PLC
1

Input is from a
channel in an Analog
Input Module

Output to the PV
of a PID Block

Add a Normally open


contact to operate the
PID

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

37

Output is to a
channel of the
Analog Output
Module

Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Monitor PID Operation

Open a PID Monitoring window in SoftMaster from Monitor PID


Monitoring
Select the Block0 and
Loop0 PID Block

PID Trend

Change the SP, Tuning


Parameters, Range and
other parameters from the
Setting View
MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

38

19

Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement


4/25/2012

6
Output from the
PID Block

Honeywell

PID Parameters Memory Addresses


PID parameters are stored in %K area in data memory
Table below lists addresses for some parameters of three loops
Parameter
Loop

PV

OP

SP

Proportional
Gain

Integral time

Derivative time

Block 0
Loop 0

_PID0_00PV
(Address:
%KW38)

_PID0_00MV
(Address:
%KW40)

_PID0_00SV
(Address:
%KW24)

_PID0_00K_p
(Address:
%KD13)

_PID0_00T_i
(Address:
%KD14)

_PID0_00T_d
(Address:
%KD15)

Block 1
Loop 2

_PID1_02PV
(Address:
%KW1152)

_PID1_02MV
(Address:
%KW1154)

_PID1_02SV
(Address:
%KW1138)

_PID1_02K_p
(Address:
%KD70)

_PID1_02T_i
(Address:
%KD71)

_PID1_02T_d
(Address:
%K72)

Block 2
Loop 4

_PID2_04PV
(Address:
%KW2266)

_PID2_04MV
(Address:
%KW2268)

_PID2_04SV
(Address:
%KW2252)

_PID2_04K_p
(Address:
%KD1127)

_PID2_04T_i
(Address:
%KD1128)

_PID2_04T_d
(Address:
%K1129)

In Global Variables
page on Flag tab
select Flag type as
PID
Memory addresses
for all parameters for
all 256 PID loops are
listed
MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

39

Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement


4/25/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

MasterLogic Programming Languages

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

40

20

Describe a Typical Control Logic Statement


4/25/2012

Topic: MasterLogic Programming Languages


Contents
Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster .............................................................................3
Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster ..........................................................33
Create Program Using ST ...................................................................................................................53
Create Program Using SFC .................................................................................................................63
Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks ................................................................................77

Create User Defined Data Types ........................................................................................................95

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster


Objective
The objective of this LAB is to demonstrate the creation and simulation of a Discrete Logic in the
ML200R PLC.
Prerequisites

Soft Master installed and configured on the Experion Server

Introduction

In this lab, you will perform the following:


o Understand the process mentioned below which needs to be implemented
o Create I/O listing
o Develop Ladder Logic to implement the process
5

o Simulate the Ladder Logic using Soft Master simulator


o Monitor and operate the simulated I/O

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Process:

Create Control Logic with the Ladder diagram for the Elevator example as shown in the schematic.
The following hardware specifications define the equipment used in the Elevator;
Output Elements:
M1 = Motor to drive the platform UP
M2 = Motor to drive the platform DOWN
Input Elements:
LS1 = NC limit switch to indicate the UP position
LS2 = NC limit switch to indicate the DOWN position
START = NO push-button for START
STOP = NO push-button for STOP
UP = NO push-button for UP command
DOWN = NO push-button for DOWN command

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

The following narrative description indicates the required sequence of events for the Elevator
System:
1. When the START button is pushed, the platform is driven to the DOWN position.
2. When the STOP button is pushed, the platform is halted at whatever position it occupies at
that time.
3. When the UP button is pushed, the platform, if it is not in DOWN motion, is driven to the
UP position.
4. When the DOWN button is pushed, the platform, if it is not in UP motion, is driven to the
DOWN position.
Explanation:
The START button latching logic will initially be created by using the following variables:

PB1 for Start


LS2 for DOWN position
CR1 as Contact Relay for START button latching
MOTOR2 for DOWN motion
The STOP sequence logic, along with the master control for the entire system will then be created
by using the following variables:
PB2 for Stop
CR2 as Contact Relay for STOP button latching
CR3 as Master control for entire system
The Up-Down sequence logic for the platform using variables:
PB3 for Up
PB4 for Down
LS1 for UP position
MOTOR1 for UP motion
CR4 as Contact Relay for UP button latching
CR5 as Contact Relay for DOWN button latching

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Procedures

Step

Action

1
ATTENTION
Basics of the Ladder programming are provided in the
Reference content. If needed, you can go through this
objective to understand the basics of creating Ladder
Logic

Open SoftMaster Application from StartAll ProgramsSoftMasterSoftMaster

Select Project New Project from Soft Master.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step

Enter the Following information for the new project;


Project Name

: Elevator Example

PLC Series

: ML-200 R

Program Name

: Ladder_Program

Program Language

: LD

Action

4/25/2012

Click OK.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step
6

Action
Double-Click the I/O Parameter under the Project Window in SoftMaster.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step

Action

Close the Base00 drop-down menu and expand the Base 01 drop-down menu. In Base
01 add the following;
Slot 0

: DC 24V INPUT ,8points

Slot 1

: RELAY OUTPUT ,8points

4/25/2012

Click OK.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step
9

Action
Expand Scan Program Ladder_Program Local Variables in Project Tree
Double-Click the Local Variables
In the Local Variables area, enter the following:

10

11

10

Variable Kind

: VAR

Variable

: PB1

Type

: BOOL

Address

: %IX1.0.0

Comment

: START Button

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step
12

Action
Right-click in the blank parameters area and select Insert Line to add more variables.

Note: Press enter after each line to create new line for next variable

4/25/2012

Add three more variables with the following information;


Variable Kind

: VAR

Variable

: LS2

Type

: BOOL

Address

: %IX1.0.1

Comment

: Down Position Limit Switch

Variable Kind

: VAR

Variable

: CR1

Type

: BOOL

Address

: %MX0

Comment

: START button Contact Relay

Variable Kind

: VAR

Variable

: MOTOR2

Type

: BOOL

Address

: %QX1.1.0

Comment

: DOWN Motion Motor Contactor

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

13

11

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step
14

15

12

Action
Double-Click on the Program item under the Project Window to open the Ladder
Diagram editor.

Select

button from the LD Toolbar.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step
16

Action
Select Row 0, Column 0 of the Ladder Diagram editor window.

ATTENTION
The F3 or the Normally Open Contact cursor will
follow the mouse pointer.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

13

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

14

Step

Action

17

The Select Variable dialog box opens. Type Variable name as PB1. PB1 variable will be
selected automatically from the list.

18

The Normally Open Contact is now associated to PB1.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step
19

Select the
button from the Ladder Diagram (LD) Toolbar. Click on Row 0, Column
2 of the Ladder Diagram editor window and associate the Normally Closed Contact
(F4) to LS2 variable from the Select Variable dialog box.

Select the
button from the Ladder Diagram (LD) Toolbar. Click on Row 0, Column
9 of the Ladder Diagram editor window and associate the Coil (F9) to CR1 variable from
the Select Variable dialog box.

20

Action

21

22

4/25/2012

Select the
button from the Ladder Diagram (LD) Toolbar. Click on Row 0, Column
1 of the Ladder Diagram editor window to connect PB1 to LS2, using the Horizontal
Line (F5) rung connector.

Select the
button from the Ladder Diagram (LD) Toolbar. Click on Row 1, Column
0 of the Ladder Diagram editor window and associate the Normally Open Contact (F3)
to CR1 variable from the Select Variable dialog box.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

15

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step
23

16

Action
Select the
button from the Ladder Diagram (LD) Toolbar to create a parallel
connection of CR1 to the PB1 using the Vertical Line (F6) rung connector.

24

Complete the second rung of the Ladder diagram to add a Coil (F9) associated to
MOTOR2 variable from the Select Variable dialog box.

25

Save the program.

26

To simulate the Ladder logic created, start the ML200R simulator from Tools Start
Simulator.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step

Check all the items in the Write dialog box from the current project to be downloaded to
the simulator.

27

Action

ATTENTION
The Write Dialog box is displayed after a delay.

4/25/2012

28

Click OK.

29

View the Check Program tab on the Message Window. Correct errors, if any.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

17

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step
30

31

Action
Select Tools Start Channel Monitoring from the SoftMaster-SM window.

In the SoftMaster window select the


ML200R PLC Simulator to RUN mode.

button from the online toolbar to set the

32

Select Yes.

18

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step

Double-click on the Input-Output devices from the simulator to view the status under the
monitor mode.

33

Action

ATTENTION
The Devices that were added as Digital Input and
Digital Output have been represented as;
B1S00 : DC 24V INPUT ,32points
B1S01 : TR OUTPUT ,32points
Where B#S## denoted Base # with Slot ##

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

19

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step
34

20

Action
Double-click on the Channel Value of Channel No 1 from the Digital Input or B1S00.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step
35

Action
Set Channel Value to ON.

Re-Select Channel Value of Channel No 1 from the Digital Input or B1S00 to Reset
Channel Value to OFF.

ATTENTION
In an actual Process Condition the hardware Channel
No 1 from B1S00 module will be Push button.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

21

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step
36

Action
In SoftMaster view that the Start switch latch logic is verified.

TIP
CR1 variable is memory location %MX0, which can be
viewed and RESET in Address Monitoring tool
accessible in SoftMaster from Monitor Address
Monitoring where status of M memory area should be
viewed in 1-Bit (

37

22

) mode with HEX (

) notation.

Stop the Simulator by clicking on Tools Stop Simulator.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step
38

4/25/2012

Action
Add the following to Local Variables for STOP sequence and Master Control;
Variable Kind

: VAR

Variable

: PB2

Type

: BOOL

Address

: %IX1.0.2

Comment

: STOP Button

Variable Kind

: VAR

Variable

: CR2

Type

: BOOL

Address

: %MX1

Comment

: STOP button Contact Relay

Variable Kind

: VAR

Variable

: CR3

Type

: BOOL

Address

: %MX2

Comment

: Contact Relay for entire system Master control

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

23

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step

Action

39

Select Row 5, Column 0 of the Ladder Diagram editor window.

40

Create the STOP logic as shown in the screen capture.

ATTENTION
Contact Relay CR3 will be utilized as the master
control, which is the subsidiary action as a result of the
STOP button or PB2
41

Save the Program.


TIP
The STOP Logic can be simulated in the simulator at
this stage.

24

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step
42

4/25/2012

Action
Add the following to Local Variables for Up Sequence;
Variable Kind

: VAR

Variable

: PB3

Type

: BOOL

Address

: %IX1.0.3

Comment

: UP Button

Variable Kind

: VAR

Variable

: LS1

Type

: BOOL

Address

: %IX1.0.5

Comment

: Up Position Limit Switch

Variable Kind

: VAR

Variable

: MOTOR1

Type

: BOOL

Address

: %QX1.1.2

Comment

: UP Motion Motor Contactor

Variable Kind

: VAR

Variable

: CR4

Type

: BOOL

Address

: %MX3

Comment

: UP button Contact Relay

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

25

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step
43

Action
Select Program from Project window to open Ladder_Program[Program] window.
Create the UP Logic as shown in the screen capture.

44

Select Row 3, Column 4 of the Ladder Diagram editor window.


Delete the Horizontal Line in this block.

45

Select the
button from the Ladder Diagram (LD) Toolbar. Add the element to the
Ladder Diagram editor window and associate the Normally Closed Contact (F4) to CR4
variable from the Select Variable dialog box.

ATTENTION
CR4 will not allow the MOTOR2 action when MOTOR1
is ON

26

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step

Add the following to Local Variables for Down Sequence;


Variable Kind

: VAR

Variable

: PB4

Type

: BOOL

Address

: %IX1.0.4

Comment

: DOWN Button

Variable Kind

: VAR

Variable

: CR5

Type

: BOOL

Address

: %MX4

Comment

: DOWN button Contact Relay

46

Action

Select Ladder_Program[Program] tab


47

4/25/2012

Create the DOWN Logic as shown in the screen capture.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

27

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step
48

Action
Select Row 4, Column 0 of the Ladder Diagram editor window, and create a parallel
Normally Open (F3) contact to CR1.
Associate the Normally Open Contact (F3) to CR5 Variable from the Select Variable
dialog box

49

Select Row 12, Column 4 of the Ladder Diagram editor window.


Delete the Horizontal Line in this block.

50

Select the
button from the Ladder Diagram (LD) Toolbar. Add the element to the
Ladder Diagram editor window and associate the Normally Closed Contact (F4) to CR5
variable from the Select Variable dialog box.

ATTENTION
CR5 will commutate the MOTOR1 action when
MOTOR2 is ON

51

Select Row 3, Column 7 of the Ladder Diagram editor window.


Delete the Horizantal Line in this block.

28

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step
52

Action
Select the
button from the Ladder Diagram (LD) Toolbar. Add the element to the
Ladder Diagram editor window and associate the Normally Closed Contact (F4) to PB2
variable from the Select Variable dialog box.

Similarly, add Normally Closed Contact (F4) for PB2 at Row12 Column 7

54

Verify that the final control logic is as follows;

55

Save the program.

53

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

29

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step
56

Action
Add the Input and Output Variables to be monitored in the Variable Monitor inside
SoftMaster.

TIP
The variable name needs to be manually typeD in the
Variable Name/Address field.

57

30

Add all Input-Output variables to Monitor 1 window as shown in the screen capture
below.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step

Action

58

Add all Contact Relay variables to the Monitor 2 window as shown in the screencapture below.

59

To simulate the Ladder Logic created, start the ML200R simulator from Tools Start
Simulator, from SoftMaster.
Click OK on the Write window.
Click OK on SoftMaster window.
View the Check Program tab in SoftMaster on the Message Window. Correct errors, if
any.

61

Select Tools Start Channel Monitoring from the SoftMaster-SM window.

62

60

In the SoftMaster window, select the


ML200R PLC Simulator to RUN mode.

button from the online toolbar to set the

Click Yes on SoftMaster window.


63

Monitor the Input-Output variables.

ATTENTION
The Input / Output should be Set / Reset from the
Channel Monitoring in ML200R Simulator.
The Monitoring is view-only.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

31

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Implement Discrete Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step

Action

64

Monitor the Contact Relay variables.

65

In the Simulator, simulate the Elevator Ladder Program in the MasterLogic.


Verify that the following expected results are obtained;
Start

Stop

Up

Down

LS1

LS2

MOTOR1

MOTOR2

TRUE

FALSE

FALSE

FALSE

FALSE

FALSE

OFF

ON

FALSE

TRUE

FALSE

FALSE

FALSE

FALSE

OFF

OFF

FALSE

FALSE

TRUE

FALSE

FALSE

FALSE

ON

OFF

FALSE

FALSE

FALSE

TRUE

FALSE

FALSE

OFF

ON

FALSE

FALSE

FALSE

FALSE

TRUE

FALSE

OFF

OFF

FALSE

FALSE

FALSE

FALSE

FALSE

TRUE

OFF

OFF

ATTENTION
The button(s) are Push to ON type, which need to be
reset manually.
LS1 and LS2 need to be OFF normally, which is to be
done manually.

32

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster


Practice
Objective
The objective of this LAB is to create and simulate analog control logic in the ML200R PLC.

Process Description:

Create control logic with a Ladder diagram for the example shown above. Analog Input current
from a water level sensor (4~20mA) comes into the ML200R. PID Control Logic is executed in the
ML200R and the PID produces an Analog Output Voltage (4~20mA). This analog output is used to
control the water level in the tank

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

33

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Detailed Instructions

34

Step

Action

Open SoftMaster from Start All Programs SoftMaster SoftMaster.

Select Project New Project from SoftMaster.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step
3

Action
Enter the Following information for the new project.
Project Name: PID Loop Example
PLC Series: ML-200 R
Program Name: Ladder_Program

Program Language: LD

4/25/2012

Click OK when finished.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

35

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step

Action

Double-click I/O Parameter under the Project Window in SoftMaster.

Close the Base00 drop-down menu and open the Base 01 drop-down menu. In Base 01
add the following:
Slot 2: 2MLF-AC8A(Current, 8-CH)
Slot 3: 2MLF-DC8A(Current, 8-CH)

36

Select 2MLF-AC8A(Current, 8-CH) and click on Details button.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step
8

Action
In the 2MLF-AC8A(Current, 8-CH) dialog box, select the following for CH0:
Channel status: Enable
Input Range: 4~20mA

Output type: 0~16000

Click OK.

10

Select 2MLF-DC8A (Current, 8-CH) and click on Details button.

11

In the 2MLF-DC8A(Current, 8-CH) dialog box, select the following for CH0:
Select Channel status: Enable
Output Range: 4~20mA
Input type: 0~16000
CH. Output type: Min value

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

37

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster

38

Step

Action

12

Click OK.

13

In the I/O Parameter Settings dialog box, click OK.

14

In response to the SoftMaster dialog box, click Yes.

15

In the Register Special Modules Variables Window, select all the modules and click
OK

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step

4/25/2012

Action

16

Double-Click Local Variables under the Project Window in SoftMaster.

17

In the Local Variables dialog box, define the following variables:

Variable Kind

Variable

Type

Address

VAR_External

_0102_CH0_DATA

INT

%UW1.2.3

VAR_External

_0103_CH0_DATA

INT

%UW1.3.3

VAR

StartPID

BOOL

%MX10

VAR

Block

UINT

%MW10

VAR

Loop

UINT

%MW11

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

39

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step
18

19

Action
Double-click on Program in the Project Window to open the Ladder Diagram editor.

Select the

button from the LD Toolbar and click in the Program window.

TIP
The F10 or the Function/FB cursor will follow the
mouse pointer.

40

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step

The Function/Function Block dialog box opens.

Select Function/Function Block

Enter the Name: MOVE

20

Action

21

4/25/2012

Click on Search.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

41

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step

Action

22

Click OK.

23

In the Program editor window, connect the EN pin with the horizontal line F5.

24

Press ESC(escape) key


Double-click next to the IN parameter in the MOVE function.

25

In the Select Variable window, enter/select the following:


Variable: _0102_CH0_DATA
Variable List: Local Variable

42

26

Click OK.

27

Double-click on the OUT parameter in the MOVE function.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step
28

Action
In the Select Variable window, enter/select the following:
Variable List: Flag
List: PID
Deselect the Flag View checkbox All.

Select _PID0_00PV from the variable list. This is the PV parameter of a PID block.

29

ATTENTION
Variable names include block no. and loop no. So depending
upon block and loop no. appropriate variable is required to be
selected

30

4/25/2012

Click OK.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

43

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster

44

Step

Action

31

Insert the Function Block PIDRUN

32

In the Select Variable Window, select the Local Variable and type a unique Instance/
Variable Name and click OK

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step

Action

33

In the Variable Name Add window, click OK

34

Set the variables listed below:

REQ: Start PID ( Add Normally Open Contact from toolbar for StartPID )
Block: Block
Loop: Loop
35

Insert the second Function Block MOVE and set the variables listed below:
EN: connect directly with Horizontal Line F5
IN: _PID0_00MV (_PID0_00MV is accessible using the same steps mentioned in
step 28 and 29)
OUT: 0103_CH0_DATA

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

45

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster

46

Step

Action

36

In the Program window, your final program will be similar to the one shown below.

37

In the SoftMaster window, select Online Connection Settings.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step
38

Action
Make sure that connection Type is set to USB

Click Connect

39

Select Online Write


Click OK in Write dialog box

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

47

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster

48

Step

Action

40

Click Yes

41

Click OK

42

Change the PLC Mode to Run.

43

In the SoftMaster window, select Monitor PID Monitoring.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster
Step

Action

44

In the Block Information window from PID Monitoring, select the checkbox for LOOP00 in
BLOCK00 and double click it.

45

In the LOOP0_00 dialog box, set the PID parameters in Setting View as shown in the
next step.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

49

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step
46

Action
In the LOOP0_00 dialog box, set the PID parameters in the Setting View shown below:
SV: 8000
Max. MV: 16000
Min. MV: 0
AT_HYS_val: 100
AT_SV: 4000
_PID0_00K_p: 2
_PID0_00T_i: 2.2
_PID0_00T_d: 0.5

ATTENTION
The PV value is taken from the Analog Input module which
has a selected range of 4~20mA. The output type defined for
the Analog Input module is 0~16000.
Set Value (SV) is a scaled based on the output type defined.
Example: If the SV is 8000, then it is equivalent to 12mA.

47

In Softmaster click Monitor Start Monitoring


In the Program window, turn on the StartPID bit for the PIDRUN block

50

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step
48

Action
Change the PID PV value to 6020 by changing current input to CH0 of AI module

ATTENTION
Use Analog Input potentiometer on ML200R kit to change the
value
PV = 6020 is equivalent to 10mA. Set the AI potentiometer to
10mA.

In the LOOP0_00 window, monitor the trend for the PID parameters PV, SV, and MV.

49

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

51

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create and Implement Analog Control Logic Using SoftMaster

Step
50

Action
In Softmaster select Monitor Address Monitoring
Set %UX1.3.32 to 1
This will enable the output at CH0 of AO module.
You can observe the respective current value in Analog Output display on your kit.

51

Change the PID PV value to 11020 by changing current input to CH0 of AI module.
PV=11020 is equivalent to 15mA

52

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create Program Using ST

Create Program Using ST


Practice
Objective
The objective of this lab is to create a program using Structured Text (ST) language in the ML200R
PLC.
Prerequisites
SoftMaster is installed and configured.
Introduction
In this lab, you will perform the following:
Write a simple program using Structured Text (ST) Language

Load and monitor the program using SoftMaster Simulator


5

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

53

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create Program Using ST

Procedures

Step

Action

Open SoftMaster from Start All Programs SoftMaster SoftMaster.

From the Project menu in SoftMaster, select Open from PLC

TIP
Open from PLC will upload the project information from the
PLC along with the hardware details.
Open Project will open a previously configured project in
the offline mode.
New Project will create a new project in the offline mode.

54

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create Program Using ST

Step

In the Online Connection Settings, select USB as the connection type, and click
Connect.

Action

ATTENTION
Connection Type can be USB, Extended base USB or
RS-232C with depth Local.
If the Connection Type selected is RS-232C, then click
the Settings tab and select the COM Port used and
enter the Baud Rate.
Ethernet Connections cannot be used because the
FEnet Module is not yet configured.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

55

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create Program Using ST

Step
4

Action
In response to the SoftMaster information dialog box, click OK.

TIP
If the connection is successfully established, the
above dialog box appears.
If the connection is unsuccessful, then an error dialog
box will appear stating Cannot use USB port. Check
the connection state and try again.
If you get an error message, verify the connection
setting and cable connections and retry.

56

In the Project Window of SoftMaster, double click on I/O Parameters.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create Program Using ST
Step

Action

Check the I/O modules in the I/O Parameter Setting window.

Click OK.

Disconnect from the PLC by clicking Disconnect from the Online Menu.

In the Project Window select and Right-click on Scan Program.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

57

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create Program Using ST

Step

Action

10

Select Add Item Program

11

Enter the Program name: STProgram


Select ST for the Language and click OK

ATTENTION
Do not use special characters in Program name.

58

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create Program Using ST
Step

Action

12

In the Project Window, expand ST Program and double click on Local Variables.

13

In the Local Variables window, define the following variables:

14

4/25/2012

Variable Kind

: VAR

Variable

: Motor

Type

: BOOL

Address

: %QX1.1.10

Variable Kind

: VAR

Variable

: Start

Type

: BOOL

Address

: %IX1.0.10

Variable Kind

: VAR

Variable

: Stop1

Type

: BOOL

Address

: %IX1.0.11

In the Project Window, expand ST Program and double-click on Program.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

59

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create Program Using ST

Step
15

Action
In the ST Program Window, write a simple ST Start/Stop sequence program as shown:
Motor:= (Start OR Motor) AND NOT Stop1;

ATTENTION
Refer to the Start/ Stop sequence in the Ladder program
from the lab Configure ML200R using SoftMaster.

16

In the SoftMaster Window, select View Check Program

17

Click OK on Program Check New PLC window.

18

Monitor the Check Program tab in the Message Window.

19

In the SoftMaster Window, select Tools Start Simulator

20

Click OK on Write window.


Click OK on SoftMaster window.

60

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create Program Using ST

Step
21
22

Action
Set the PLC mode to Run
In Simulator window, select Start Monitoring

tool.

Change the value of channel 10 of 2MLI-DC4A module to ON

Observe that Start variable is set to 1


In the Monitoring Window, observe the value of the Motor variable.

24

Change the value of channel 11 of 2MLI-DC4A module to ON

23

Observe that Stop1 variable is set to 1


25

4/25/2012

In the Monitoring Window, note the value of the Motor variable.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

61

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create Program Using ST

This page was intentionally left blank.

62

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create Program Using SFC

Create Program Using SFC


Practice
Objective
The objective of this lab is to create a program using Sequential Function Chart (SFC) Language for
the ML200R PLC.
Prerequisites
SoftMaster (MasterLogic Programming software) is installed.
Introduction
In this lab, you will perform the following:
Create a simple program using SFC

Execute the program using the SoftMaster Simulator

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

63

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create Program Using SFC

Procedures

Step

Action

Open SoftMaster from Start All Programs SoftMaster SoftMaster.

Select Project New Project from SoftMaster.

TIP
Open from PLC will upload the project information from the
PLC along with the hardware details.
Open Project will open a previously configured project in
the offline mode.
New Project will create a new project in the offline mode.

64

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create Program Using SFC

Step
3

Action
Enter the following information for the new project:
Project Name: Test1
PLC Series: ML-200 R
Program Name: SFCProgram

Program Language: SFC

4/25/2012

Click OK.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

65

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create Program Using SFC

Step
5

66

Action
Expand the Test1 project and double click on Local Variables.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create Program Using SFC

Step

In the Local Variables window, define the variables shown below:


Variable Kind

Variable

Type

VAR

a1

SINT

VAR

SINT

VAR

Complete

BOOL

VAR

GOTO_INIT

BOOL

VAR

ts1

BOOL

VAR

ts2

BOOL

VAR

ts2_1

BOOL

VAR

Ts3

BOOL

VAR

Ts4

BOOL

VAR

Ts5

BOOL

Action

TIP
GOTO_INIT will be present by default and there may
not be any need to create it separately

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

67

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create Program Using SFC

Step

Action

Double-click on Program in the Project Window.

In the SFC Toolbar, select F3 and click in the Program window.

TIP
The F3 or the Step cursor will follow the mouse pointer.

68

In the Program Editor window, the initial Step S0 appears.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create Program Using SFC

Step

Action

10

Double-click on Transition in the Program Editor window.

11

In the Transition Properties window, enter the following:


Name: ts1
Comment: If ts1 is true the program will move to the next step

12

Click OK.

13

Insert a new step S1 below step S0 in the Program window using F3.

14

Insert a new step S2 below step S1 in the Program window using F3.

15

Select F8

Type: Variable

(Left Branch) and click on step S1.

TIP
The F8 or the Left Branch cursor will follow the mouse pointer.

4/25/2012

16

In the Program Editor window, two circles will appear around S1 and the transition.

17

Click on the circle in the Transition area.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

69

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create Program Using SFC

Step

Action

18

In the Program Editor window, a Selection Branch will appear between S1 and S2 as
shown below.

19

Click on the Transition between steps S1 and S2.

20

In the Transition properties window, enter the following:


Name: ts2
Comment: If ts2 is true, the program will move to the next step.
Type: Variable
Click OK.

21
Select F7

(Jump) and click on the Transition parallel to ts2.

Click here

TIP
The F7 or the Jump cursor will follow the mouse pointer.

70

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create Program Using SFC
Step

Action

22

In the Jump Properties window, type cc1. Click OK.

23

Click on the transition parallel to ts2.

24

In the Transition Properties window, enter the following:

Name: ts2_1
Comment: If ts2_1 is true, program will jump to label cc1.
Type: Variable
Click OK.
25

Add a transition Ts3 after step S2.

26

In the Transition Properties window, enter the following:


Name: Ts3
Comment: If Ts3 is true, program will execute next step.
Type: Variable
Click OK.

27
28

4/25/2012

Add steps S3 and S4 after step S2.


Select F8

(Left Branch) and click on transition ts3 (between steps S2 and S3).

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

71

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create Program Using SFC

Step

Action

29

In the Program Editor window, two circles appear on S3 and the transition before it.

30

Click on step S3.

31

In the Program Editor window, a Parallel Branch appears as shown below.

32

Select F4

(Action) and click on step S5.


TIP
The F4 or the Action cursor will follow the mouse pointer

33

In the Action Properties window, enter the Name: Program1


Select Type: Program

72

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create Program Using SFC

Step

Action

34

Click OK.

35

In the Add Program window, select Language LD.

36

Click OK.

37

Right-click Program1 and select Open Program

In the Program Editor window, write an LD Program for Program1 as shown below.

ATTENTION
The variables used in the program (a1, b, Complete and so
on) were already defined in step 6
Note that the EN pin of ADD block is connected to a Positive
Transition input.
Select Shift+F1 to insert Positive Transition sensing contact.
Associate it with flag _T1S
The procedure to create a Ladder diagram was explained in
Implement Discrete Control Logic using SoftMaster lab.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

73

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create Program Using SFC

Step

Action

38

Double-click on the Transition between step S3 and S4.

39

In the Transition Properties window, enter the following:


Name: ts4
Comment: If Ts4 is true, program will move to next step.
Type: Variable
Click OK.

40

Select F6

(Label) and click on S4.

TIP
The F6 or the Label cursor will follow the mouse pointer.
41

In the Label Properties window, type cc1.

42

Click OK.

43

Double-click on the Transition after step S4.

44

In Transition Properties window, enter the following:


Name: Ts5
Comment: If ts5 is true, program will move to next step.
Type: Variable
Click OK.

74

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create Program Using SFC
Step

Action

45

The final program, in the Program Editor window the following will appear.

46

In the SoftMaster Window, select View Check Program

Click OK on Program Check window


47

4/25/2012

In the Check Program tabs Message Window, ensure there are no errors.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

75

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create Program Using SFC

Step
48

Action
In the SoftMaster window, select Tools Start Simulator.
Click OK on Write window.
Click OK on SoftMaster window.

76

49

Change the PLC Mode to Run.

50

In the Program Editor window, observe that Step S0 is being executed.

51

Double-click on transition ts1.

52

In the Change Current Value dialog box, select On for Set Value and click OK.

53

Step S1 will start executing since ts1 is true.

54

Monitor the program and simulate the other transitions.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks

Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks


Practice
Objective
The objective of this lab is to create a User Defined Function Block using Ladder Diagram (LD)
language for the ML200R PLC.
Prerequisites
SoftMaster is installed and configured
Introduction

Create a User defined function block

Implement the function block in the main program

Load and Monitor using the SoftMaster Simulator

Import a pre-configured Control Module which has PIDA block

Load and observe its performance after changing the set point

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

In this lab, you will perform the following:

77

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks

Procedures

Step

Action

Create User Defined Function Block.


1

78

Open SoftMaster from Start All Programs SoftMaster SoftMaster.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks

Step
2

Action
From the Project Menu in SoftMaster select Open from PLC

TIP

Open from PLC will upload the project information


from the PLC along with the hardware details.
Open Project will open a previously configured project
in the offline mode.
New Project will create a new project in the offline
mode.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

79

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks

Step
3

Action
In Online Settings, select USB as the connection type, and click Connect.

ATTENTION
Connection type can be USB, Extended base USB or
RS-232C with depth Local.
If the connection type selected is RS-232C, then click
the Settings tab and select the COM Port used and
enter the baud rate.
Ethernet Connection cannot be used because FEnet
Module is not yet configured.

80

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks

Step
4

Action
In response to the SoftMaster information dialog box, click OK.

TIP
If the connection is successfully established, the above
dialog box appears.
If the connection is unsuccessful, then an error dialog
box will appear stating Cannot use USB port. Check
the connection state and try again.

4/25/2012

If you get an error message, verify the connection


setting and cable connections and retry.

In the Project Window of SoftMaster, double-click on I/O Parameters.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

81

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks

Step

Action

Check the I/O modules in the I/O Parameter Setting window.

Click OK.

8
ATTENTION
To configure items under Scan Program, first
disconnect from the PLC by clicking Online
Disconnect
In Project Window select and Right-click on User Function/Function Block.

82

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks

Step

Action

Select Add Item Function Block

10

In the User Function/Function Block window:


Type the Program name: TwooutofThree
Select Language: LD

Select the check box: Use EN/ENO

11
4/25/2012

Click OK
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

83

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks

84

Step

Action

12

In Project Window, expand TwooutofThree and double-click on Local Variables.

13

In the Local Variables window enter the following:


Variable Kind

Variable

Type

VAR_INPUT

Input1

BOOL

VAR_INPUT

Input2

BOOL

VAR_INPUT

Input3

BOOL

VAR

Out1

BOOL

VAR

Out2

BOOL

VAR

Out3

BOOL

VAR_OUTPUT

Output1

BOOL

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks

Step

Action

14

In Project Window, expand TwooutofThree and double-click on Program.

15

Select F10 from the LD Toolbar and click on the Program window.

16

We will now insert a function in the Program Window.

TIP

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Using [F10] in the Program Window will open a


function block library.

85

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks

Step
17

Action
In the Function/Function Block dialog box enter the following:
Name: AND
Select the List option: Function/Function Block
Click the Search button.

18

In the Function Information section of the dialog box, enter the number of inputs as 2.

19

Click OK.

20

Repeat steps 15 to 19 and add two more AND functions and one OR function from the
function library
ATTENTION
For the OR function, enter the No. of Inputs as 3 in Step 18.

86

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks
Step

Action

21

In the Program Window, connect the EN pin directly with a horizontal line.

22

In the AND function block, double-click on IN1.

23

In the Select Variable window select Local Variable from the Variable List and enter
Input1 as the Variable.

24

Click OK.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

87

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks

Step
25

Action
Repeat steps 22 to 24 for adding variables to IN2 and OUT.

ATTENTION
For IN2 add Input2 as the variable in the AND
Function.
For OUT add Out1 as the variable in the AND
Function.
26

Select the following:


For the second AND function add:
IN1

: Input2

IN2

: Input3

OUT

: Out2

For the third AND function add:

27

88

IN1

: Input1

IN2

: Input3

OUT

: Out3

For the OR function select the following:


IN1

: Out1

IN2

: Out2

IN3

: Out3

OUT

: Output1

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks
Step

Action

28

The logic for your Function Block TwooutofThree is illustrated below.

29

In the SoftMaster Window select View Check Program

30

In the Check Range section of the Program Check window, select Current program
(TwooutofThree).

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

89

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks

Step

Action

31

Click OK.

32

Monitor the Check Program tab in the Message Window.

User Defined Function Block in Scan Program.

90

33

In the Project Window select and right-click on Scan Program.

34

Select Add Item Program

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks

Step
35

Action
In the Program Window type:
Program name: Test1
Select Language: LD

Click OK.

37

In Project Window, expand Test1 and double-click on Local Variables.

38

In the Local Variables window, define the following variables:

39

4/25/2012

36

Variable Kind

Variable

Type

Address

VAR

BOOL

%IX1.0.0

VAR

BOOL

%IX1.0.1

VAR

BOOL

%IX1.0.2

VAR

BOOL

%QX1.1.0

In the Project Window, expand Test1 and double-click on Program.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

91

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks

92

Step

Action

40

In the Program Window click on F10 from the LD toolbar.

41

In the Function/Function Block window, select Function Block and enter the Name
TwooutofThree.

42

Click Search and click OK

43

In Select Variable Dialog Box, select Local Variable and Click OK

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks
Step

Action

44

In Variable Name/Add Dialog Box click OK

45

Connect the input and output variables defined in Local Variables to the function block.

46

In the SoftMaster Window select View Check Program

47

In the Program Check window select Current program (Test1) in Check Range and
click OK.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

93

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Function / Function Blocks

Step

Action

48

Monitor the Check Program tab in the Message Window.

49

In the SoftMaster window, select Tools Start Simulator.


Click OK on Write window.
Click OK on SoftMaster window.

94

50

Change the Mode of the PLC to Run.

51

In the Program Window, double-click on A.

52

In the Change Current Value dialog box, select On for Value.

53

Click OK.

54

Verify the values of variable D.


A

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Data Types

Create User Defined Data Types


Practice
Objective

The objective of this LAB is to configure and demonstrate the use of User Data Type in the
ML200R PLC program

Prerequisites
SoftMaster (MasterLogic Programming software) is installed

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

95

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Data Types

Procedures

Step

Action

Configure User Data Type in the Project.


1

Open SoftMaster Application from StartAll ProgramsSoftMasterSoftMaster

Select ProjectNew Project from Soft Master menu bar

Enter the following information for in the New Project dialog box
Project Name

UD DATA TYPE

Leave other settings to default and click OK

96

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Data Types

Step

Action

In Project Tab, right-click on User Data Type and select Add Item Data Type

In the User Data Type dialog box, enter the following:


Name: POINT
Comment: X/Y AXIS

Click OK

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

97

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Data Types

Step
6

98

Action
In the POINT window, enter the following:
Variable

Type

Comment

INT

X Axis Point

INT

Y Axis Point

Double-click on Local Variables in the project window

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Data Types

Step
8

Action
Enter the following:
Variable Kind: VAR
Variable: ORIGIN
Select STRUCT as Type and press enter

In the User-defined Data Type Select dialog box, select POINT and click OK

4/25/2012

Double-click on Program in the Project window

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

99

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Data Types

Step
10

In LD Toolbar, select sF1 (

) and click on the Program Window

11

In the Select Variable dialog box, enter A for Variable and click OK

12

Click OK in the Variable Name Add dialog box

13

100

Action

In LD Toolbar, select F10 (

) and click on Row 0, Column 1 of program window

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Data Types

Step
14

Action
In the Function / Function Block dialog box, select the following:
List: Function
In Function List, select ADD

Click OK and press ESC

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

101

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Data Types

Step

Action

15

Double-click on IN1 pin in ADD function

16

In the Select Variable dialog box, enter the Variable as ORIGINX and click OK
In the Variable Name Add dialog box, click OK

102

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Data Types

Step
17

Action
Double-click on OUT pin of the ADD function
In the Select variable dialog box, enter Variable as ORIGINX
Click OK on Select Variable dialog box

18

Repeat steps 13 to 17 to add another ADD function

ATTENTION
In Step 13, select Row 0, Column 5
In Step 16, enter Variable as ORIGINY
In Step 17, enter Variable as ORIGINY
19

Connect EN0 pin of the first ADD function with the EN pin of the second ADD function
)

using F5 (

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

103

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Data Types

Step
20

Action
Double-click IN2 Pin of the first ADD function
In the Select Variable dialog box, enter the variable as 100 and click OK

21

Double-click on the IN2 Pin of the second ADD function and enter the Variable as 10
Click OK in the Select Variable dialog box

104

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Data Types

Step
22

Action
Double-click on Rung where the function is added
In the Comment/Label dialog box, select Comment, if not selected
Click OK in the Comment/Label dialog box

Double-click here

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

105

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Data Types

Step

Action

23

Enter the comment as Move X Axis(100), Y Axis(10) and click OK

24

Select Tools Start Simulator in Menu bar

25

In the Write dialog box, click OK

ATTENTION
It takes some time for the simulator to start and the
Write dialog box to appear

106

26

Click OK in the Writing completed dialog box

27

Select Online Change Mode Run to run the simulator

28

Click Yes in the SoftMaster dialog box

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Data Types

Step
29

Action
Double-click on variable A

Ensure that ON is selected as the Set value and click OK

30

4/25/2012

Verify whether the value 100 and 10 are written to ORIGINX and ORIGINY parameter
respectively

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

107

MasterLogic Programming Languages


Create User Defined Data Types

This page was intentionally left blank.

108

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

Describe Network Manager within SoftMaster

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Network Manager within SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

Soft Master Network Manager (SoftMaster-NM) is a software tool


available in Soft Master
Softmaster-NM is used to set up Communication Modules such a FEnet,
Snet, Device Net, and Profibus-DP(P-Net)

SoftMaster-NM Functions

Configure Communication Modules (Standard Settings)


Manage and Diagnose Communication Modules
Configure High Speed Link (HSL) Settings
Configure Peer-to-Peer (P2P) Settings
Read Communication Settings from ML200R
Write Communication Settings to ML200R
Upload Communication Settings from SYCON

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Network Manager within SoftMaster


2/2/2012

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell

SoftMaster-NM
Online Toolbar

Design
Window

Project
Window

Communication Status
with ML200R PLC
Message Window

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Network Manager within SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Online Functionality - Toolbar

Reset Individual
Module
Connect/Disconnect
from PLC

System
Diagnostics
Read I/O Information
from PLC

Connection Settings
to connect to PLC

Enable Link to start


Communication with PLC
(HS Link, P2P)

Write Parameter Settings


to PLC (Standard
Settings, HS Link, P2P)

Delete Parameter from


PLC (Standard Settings,
HS Link, P2P)

Read Parameter Settings


from PLC (Standard
Settings, HS Link, P2P)

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Network Manager within SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Open SoftMaster-NM
Open Soft Master
Select Tools Network Manager to open SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Network Manager within SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Create a New Project


In SoftMaster-NM, select File New Project

Enter a Project
Name and File
Location
Select the PLC Type

Select the CPU Type

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Network Manager within SoftMaster


2/2/2012

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell

Read I/O Information

Connect to the PLC and then Read the I/O Information to retrieve the
I/O Module information from the PLC
Connect and Read
from PLC

No Modules
are Associated
with the Base

FEnet Module
Connected to
Base 0, Slot 0

Snet Module
Connected to
Base 1, Slot 4

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Network Manager within SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Communication Support

Standard Settings Tab

High-speed Link Tab

P2P Tab

Configure Communication Modules such as FEnet, Snet etc.


Configure High-speed Link for Communication Modules
Configure Peer-to-Peer parameters for Communication Modules

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Network Manager within SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Communication Settings

SoftMaster-NM supports configuration of the following communication


modules:
Double-click to open the FEnet
Standard Settings window

FEnet - Fast Ethernet


Communication
Snet - Serial Bus
Communication
Pnet - Prefabs
Communication
Dnet - Device Net
Communication

FEnet Module Settings

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Network Manager within SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Describe Network Manager within SoftMaster


2/2/2012

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Describe FENet Configuration

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

11

Describe FENet Configuration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

Fast Ethernet (FEnet) is an industrial use


High-speed Ethernet Communication
Module with 10/100Mbps support

FEnet Types
2MLL-EFMT
10/100Base-TX
Media UTP/STP-CAT5
2MLL-EFMF
100Base-FX (fiber-optic)
Media x62.5/125um, Multi-mode

High reliability and performance with an


In-built 32-bit Processor

Connectivity to HMI S/W (e.g. Experion


PKS)

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

2MLL-EFMT

2MLL-EFMF

UTP/STP Media

Fiber-optic Media

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

Describe FENet Configuration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Overview
FEnet Supports
Peer-to-Peer Integration with Peer MasterLogic PLCs
Experion Integration via MasterLogic Dedicated Protocol (MLDP)
MODBUS TCP/IP Master / Slave Protocol
Connectivity to SoftMaster
User-defined Protocol for interface with the third-party Devices

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

13

Describe FENet Configuration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Installation and Wiring


2MLL-EFMT Installation
Max . segment length of
10/100BASE-TX is 100m
(between this module and the
hub)
Generally a straight cable is
used (twisted with TD and RD
inside)
If only 2 communication
modules are connected 1 to 1,
the cross cable type is applied

2MLL-EFMT Installation
MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

14

Describe FENet Configuration


2/2/2012

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell

Installation and Wiring


2MLL-EFMF installation
100BASE-FX must be used
with 2 cored multimode
62.5/123 cable (SC
connector)
Can be accessed by optic
switching hubs and optic
converters
Maximum extended length
between nodes can be
2 Km
Refer to the user manual
for detailed information

2MLL-EFMF Installation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

15

Describe FENet Configuration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

FEnet Sample Application

Architecture of 100BASE-TX or FX Network of MasterLogic PLC


SoftMaster Communicates with PLC[1] on a local USB or RS-232C
SoftMaster Communicates (for programming) with other PLCs through
Ethernet Network
Peer-to-Peer Communication among PLCs
SoftMaster Node
PLC [1]
IP:210.206.91.188

PLC [2]
IP:210.206.91.189

PLC [n]
IP:210.206.91.190

USB or RS-232C
Ethernet Network

Local Connection
MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Logical Connection via Ethernet Communication Module (remote)


Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

16

Describe FENet Configuration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Open SoftMaster NM
Select File Open from PLC

In Online Settings, select type USB

Click Connect

For RS-232C Connections


Click the Settings button
Configure COM Port
selection
Configure Baud rate

An Ethernet connection cannot be


used because the FEnet Module is
not configured

On successful connection, the


following message is displayed
Reading is completed

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

17

Describe FENet Configuration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

FEnet Configuration

If the connection is not successful, the following error message is


displayed

Cannot use USB port. Check the connection state and try again.

In the event of an error message:


Verify connection settings
Verify cable connections
Retry connecting

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

18

Describe FENet Configuration


2/2/2012

FEnet Configuration

Honeywell

Network Manager SoftMaster-NM

Select the Tools menu in SoftMaster


Select Network Manager

Network Manager (SoftMaster-NM)


is a separate tool within SoftMaster
Used for configuration of
communication-related
information

Select the File menu in SoftMasterNM


Select Open from PLC
Click OK to save Network
Manager settings
Wait for reading parameters
process to complete

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

19

FEnet Configuration in SoftMaster - NM

Describe FENet Configuration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

In SoftMaster-NM
Double-click to open the FEnet
Module from the Project Window

Applicable FEnet Parameters


One IP Solution
TCP/IP Settings
HS Link Station
No. is required
to be specified.
Range 0-63

Reception Waiting Time


Number of Dedicated
Connections
Driver (Server) Settings
Host Table Settings
MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

20

10

Describe FENet Configuration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

TCP/IP Configuration Options

One IP Solution
Enable One IP Solution Configuration option for FENet Module

A-Side and B-Side Tabs


These tabs are available for configuration only when One IP Solution check box option is
not selected
These tabs are used to Configure FENet modules TCP/IP settings seperately present in
Master Logic CPU redundant system

One IP Tab
This tab is available for configuration, only when One IP Solution check box option is
selected
Used to configure single IP for the FENet Modules present in redundant CPU
One IP Solution is mainly used to integrate ML System with 3rd Party SCADA Systems
which support only one IP SCADA communication
Since Experion PKS supports redundancy for SCADA Communication, this setting
is not used while integrating ML System with Experion PKS

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

21

Honeywell

TCP/IP Settings

One IP Solution

HS Link Station No

Media

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway

DNS Server

DHCP

Copy AB or Copy BA

Describe FENet Configuration


2/2/2012

Enable One IP Solution Configuration option for FENet Module.


Unique number for HS Link Communication between ML200R PLCs FEnet I/F Modules
Range 0-63
Selection of the Physical Media Type
Internet Protocol (IP) Address
IP Mask to verify if destination station is on the same network
IP Address of the Gateway or Router to transmit/receive data through a public network or a
different network
IP Address of a domain name server
Used if the IP Address is not fixed but assigned as a Dynamic IP
Dynamic IP is used for ADSL Communication
Copy Settings for Redundant FEnet partner. This option is available only if One IP Solution
option is disabled.

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

22

11

Describe FENet Configuration


2/2/2012

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell

FEnet SettingsContinued

Reception Waiting Time


Specified time for end of dedicated communication from host PC or MMI
regardless of normal ending procedures
Time is used in a dedicated service to reset the channel for errors
occurred on a destination station or for cable disconnection errors

No of Dedicated Connections
Maximum number of TCP dedicated services (116) accessible at a time
Maximum number of dedicated connections from host PC or MMI

Driver (Server) Settings


Selection of Server drivers

Host table Settings


Setting to enable network communication only with client addresses
registered in the host table
Range 1-16

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

23

Describe FENet Configuration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

One IP Solution Configuration


Steps to enable and configure One
IP Solution for FENet Module
Open Softmaster-NM in softmaster
Tools Network Manager
Double click on FENet Module
Select the One IP Solution check
box option to enable One IP
Solution Configuration.
Enter TCP/IP setting details
This IP must be an even number

To use one IP you must select


automatic switchover for FEnet
modules in Redundancy Parameter
Settings

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

24

12

Describe FENet Configuration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

System Configuration Precautions


IP Addresses are unique for all FEnet Modules

In the event of repeated addresses, a transmission error may result leading


to incorrect communication.

Unique HS Link Station No. for all stations for efficient use of the HS
Link service
Communication cable used should be as per specifications
Ensure disconnected or short cables prior to installation
Ensure firm communication cable connector installation
For remote communication cable connections, ensure immunity from
power line or inductive noise
Ensure systematic cable routing to avoid disconnection or connector
damage
If using One IP solution then IP address configured for FEnet module
must have even number in last octet
One IP solution is mainly used for 3rd Party HMI Systems which uses
single IP and do not support SCADA redundancy

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

25

Describe FENet Configuration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

26

13

Describe FENet Configuration


2/2/2012

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Describe SNet Configuration

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe SNet Configuration


2/2/2012

27

Honeywell

Introduction
Snet Communication Interface
Modules are used for Serial
Bus Communication
The following Snet Modules
are available with ML200R
PLC:
1. Two ports for RS232C
2. Two ports for RS422/485
3. One RS232C port, one
RS422/485 port
2MLL-C22A
2-channel
RS-232C
MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

28

14

2MLL-C42A

2MLL-C22A

2-channel
1-channel RS-232C
RS-422/485 1-channel RS-422/485
Describe SNet Configuration
2/2/2012

Honeywell

Snet Overview
Snet supports

Modbus RTU master/slave protocol


Modbus ASCII master/slave protocol
SoftMaster interface
User-defined Protocol for interfacing with Third-party Devices
Open standards of the RS232C/RS422/RS485 modules allow the ML PLC to
communicate with a wide range of serial devices including:
Remote Terminal Unit (RTU)
Display Panels
Weigh Bridges
Barcode Readers
High-level computers or other Peer PLCs

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe SNet Configuration


2/2/2012

29

Honeywell

Installation and Wiring for RS-232 Connector

RS-232C Channel Connector Pin assignment and signal information


Pin
No

Signal
Name

Function

Signal Direction

Signal Description

CD

Carrier Detect

External to Snet

Informs DCE carrier detection to DTE

RxD

Received Data

External to Snet

Received data signal

TxD

Transmitted Data

Snet to External

Transmitted data signal

DTR

Data Terminal Ready

Snet to External

Informs DTE communication ready to


DCE

SG

Signal Ground

Common

Signal ground line

DSR

Data Set Ready

External to Snet

Reports ready communication of DCE


to DTE

RTS

Request To Send

Snet to External

DTE communicates to DCE to send


data.

CTS

Clear To Send

External to Snet

DCE inform ready to transmit to DTE

RI

Ring

External to Snet

DCE inform receiving Ringing Tone


to DTE

DTE: Data Terminal Equipment


DCE: Data Communication Equipment
MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

30

15

Describe SNet Configuration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Installation and Wiring for RS-232C

Long Distance MODEM

Snet (9 pin)

Connecti
vity

NULL MODEM

MODEM (25
pin)

Snet (9 pin)

Conne Communication
ctivity Device

Pin

Name

Name

Pin

Pin

Name

Name

CD

CD

CD

CD

RxD

RxD

RxD

RxD

TxD

TxD

TxD

TxD

DTR

DTR

20

DTR

DTR

SG

SG

SG

SG

DSR

DSR

DSR

DSR

RTS

RTS

RTS

RTS

CTS

CTS

CTS

CTS

RI

RI

22

RI

RI

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe SNet Configuration


2/2/2012

31

Honeywell

Installation and Wiring for RS- 422

RS-422 Channel Connector Pin assignment and signal information


Pin No.

Signal Name

Signal Direction

Function

TX+

Snet to External

Transmitted Data (+)

TX-

Snet to External

Transmitted Data (-)

RX+

External to Snet

Received Data (+)

RX-

External to Snet

Received Data (-)

SG

Common

Signal Ground Line

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

32

16

Describe SNet Configuration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Installation and Wiring for RS-422 and RS-485


RS-422 Connections

RS-485 Connections

Pin
No.

Signal Conne
Name ctivity

Communicati
on Device
Signal

Pin
No.

Signal Conne
Name ctivity

Communicati
on Device
Signal

TX+

RX+

TX+

RX+

TX-

RX-

TX-

RX-

RX+

TX+

RX+

TX+

RX-

TX-

RX-

TX-

SG

SG

SG

SG

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

33

Describe SNet Configuration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Long Distance Communication


Architecture

Dedicated modem for long distance communication between PC & PLCs

Application
HMI Server acting as a MODBUS RTU master communicates with PLCs
over RS232 using a modem
ML PLCs are communicating over RS422
HMI-PC

Snet # 1 station

RS-232C
MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Snet # 2 station

Snet # N station

RS-422 communication
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

34

17

Describe SNet Configuration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Interface to MODBUS RTU Slave Devices


Architecture
MODBUS RTU devices on RS422

Application
RS232C Port of Snet Module can be used either for SoftMaster interface or
HMI based on MODBUS RTU/ASCII
RS422 Port of Snet Module used as MODBUS RTU/ASCII master to
communicate with 3rd Party MODBUS RTU slave devices such as a
MOSAIC PANEL
MOSAIC PANEL

7-SEGMENT

7-SEGMENT

HMI-PC
Snet # 1 station

7-SEGMENT

7-SEGMENT

8
`

7-SEGMENT

8
7-SEGMENT

8
7-SEGMENT

8
RS-232C

7-SEGMENT

8
7-SEGMENT

7-SEGMENT

8
7-SEGMENT

8
7-SEGMENT

RS-422 communication

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe SNet Configuration


2/2/2012

35

Honeywell

Wireless MODEM Interface


Architecture
Wireless Modem on the RS232C Interface

Application
MasterLogic PLC can act as the MODBUS RTU/ASCII Master

Wireless Modem

Wireless Modem

Master Logic-200R PLC


Snet # 1 Station

8
7 Segment Display
RS-232C

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

36

18

Describe SNet Configuration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Open SoftMaster-NM

From the SoftMaster menu bar, select Tools Network Manager

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

37

Connect to ML200R PLC Using Serial Connection

Describe SNet Configuration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Open SoftMaster-NM from


SoftMaster
Select Project Open from PLC
Define the Serial Connection Settings
on the computer communicating to
the ML PLC
Select Type: RS-232C
Click the Settings button
Configure the COM
Port
Configure the Baud
Rate
Click OK

Click Connect in the Online Settings


window
In the event of an error message
Verify the connection settings,
verify cable connections, and
retry connecting

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

38

19

Describe SNet Configuration


2/2/2012

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell

Snet Configuration
In SoftMaster-NM
Open the Standard Settings for the Snet Module
Snet Modules are not allowed on Base 00

Double click on the


Snet Module to open
its Standard Settings

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

39

Describe SNet Configuration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Snet Configuration
Configure Channel 1 and Channel 2
Snet Parameters based on the Snet
Module
Communication Settings
Channel specific settings for
RS232C and RS485
Time Settings
Configure delay time
Active Mode
Channel Settings for
Server/Client Operations

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

40

20

Describe SNet Configuration


2/2/2012

Describe Profibus Interface Configuration


Using Sycon

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

41

Describe Profibus Interface Configuration Using Sycon


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

Profibus-DP (Decentral Periphery) Communication in the ML200R


Example Architecture:
Smart I/O Stand-alone Type on Station 1 connected to a Pnet Module
Smart I/O Extended Type on Station 2 connected to a Pnet Module
Profibus Slave
Devices - SYCON is
used for Configuration
Profibus-DP

ML200R based
Profibus-DP master

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Station-0
Profibus-DP master
2MLL-PMEA

Station-1
Smart I/O

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

42

21

Station-2 Smart I/O


(Extended Type)

Describe Profibus Interface Configuration Using Sycon


2/2/2012

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell

Features

ML uses the Pnet Module for communication with devices connected to a


Profibus-DP Network

Standardized Configuration
ML uses two software applications (SyCon and SoftMaster-NM) for configuring the
parameters related to Profibus Communication
SYCON configures the MASTER and SLAVE devices:
Master Pnet Module
Slave Devices which are connected to a Pnet Module
SYCON has a GSD (a device description file) library for all Profibus devices
SoftMaster-NM is used for:
Pnet Configuration
Uploading Profibus network settings done in SYCON for Slave Memory
allocations
It reads the Slave Settings from SyCon through Pnet
Diagnosing the Pnet Module

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

43

Describe Profibus Interface Configuration Using Sycon


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Basic Setup

Basic setup for SYCON


configuration requires a Pnet
Module connected to the SYCON
installed node through a RS-232
cable

Sycon
Setup

RS-232C

Step 1 is the addition of a Profibus


Master

Pnet Module is the Profibus Master

Selection of a Master loads the


GSD files required for the interface

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

44

22

Describe Profibus Interface Configuration Using Sycon


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Profibus Master Setup

Master Settings are done from:

The Master Setup consists of:

Settings Master Configuration


Auto-addressing

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

45

Describe Profibus Interface Configuration Using Sycon


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Profibus Master Serial Driver Setup

Sycon Serial Driver supports COM1


to COM 4 interfaces in the PC

Select Settings Device


Assignment

Select the
Applicable
Serial Port

Select the COM port to which the


Pnet Module is connected

When a COM Port is selected:


The Master is identified by the
SyCon Serial driver
The Master performs an Automatic
Network Scan
The Master identifies and displays
the Slave Devices found on the
network

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Accept the result of the


Automatic Network
Scan

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

46

23

Describe Profibus Interface Configuration Using Sycon


2/2/2012

Auto addressing checkbox -selected for automatic addressing


of the slaves to be connected
DP Master Settings
Buffered, host controlled
option is selected since it is the
common process in Profibus
Bus Parameter
Invoked from Settings Bus
Parameters
Used to configure the Baud
Rate and optimization settings
Use the default settings

Honeywell

Slave Configuration

Select Settings Slave


Configuration from the menu bar to
perform the Slave Configuration

In Slave Configuration, memory


allocation is done for the Slave
Devices:

Select
the slave
device

Addresses in the Pnet Module are


mapped with the parameters in the
Slave Device
Addresses entered here must be
identical with the addresses set in
SoftMaster-NM
Modules attached to
Extended SMART IO
(Station-2) are listed

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

47

Describe Profibus Interface Configuration Using Sycon


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Slave Communication Parameter Setup

Slave Parameter Data is configured from Settings Parameter Data


Individual channels of the Slave Device are configured here
In the Profibus architecture example, Station-2 has Extended IO
Configuration of Extended IO Modules is shown below
1

Slave Extended
IO Configuration

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

48

24

Describe Profibus Interface Configuration Using Sycon


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Configuration Download

Select the Master from SYCON

Download the slave configuration


to the Master from:

Select the Master


to download

Online Download

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

49

Describe Profibus Interface Configuration Using Sycon


2/2/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

50

25

Describe Profibus Interface Configuration Using Sycon


2/2/2012

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Describe DeviceNet Interface configuration


using SYCON

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe DeviceNet Interface configuration using SYCON

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

2/2/2012

51

Honeywell

Introduction
DeviceNet Communication in the ML200R
Devices are assigned a unique MAC ID for identification

Example Architecture:
Smart I/O stand-alone type set with MAC ID 1
Smart I/O extended type set with MAC ID 2

SYCON for DeviceNet


Slave Configuration

ML200R based
DeviceNet Master

MAC-ID-1
Smart I/O
MAC ID-0 DeviceNet
Master

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

MAC-ID-2 Smart I/O


(Extended Type)

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe DeviceNet Interface configuration using SYCON

52

26

2/2/2012

Honeywell

Features

ML uses the Dnet Module for communication with devices connected to


the DeviceNet Network
Standardized Configuration
ML uses two software applications (SyCon and SoftMaster-NM) for
configuring the parameters related to DeviceNet communication
SYCON configures the MASTER and SLAVE devices:
Master Dnet module
Slave Devices which are connected to the Dnet module
SYCON has an EDS (Electronic Data Sheet files) library for all
DeviceNet devices
SoftMaster-NM is used for:
Uploading DeviceNet network settings from SYCON
Diagnosing the Dnet module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe DeviceNet Interface configuration using SYCON

2/2/2012

53

Honeywell

Basic Setup

Basic setup for SYCON


configuration requires a Dnet
module connected to the SYCON
installed node through an RS-232
cable

Step 1 is the addition of a


DeviceNet Master:

Sycon
Setup

RS-232C

The Dnet Module is the DeviceNet


Master
2

Selection of a Master loads the


EDS files required for the interface

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Master
is now
added

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe DeviceNet Interface configuration using SYCON

54

27

2/2/2012

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell

DeviceNet Master Setup

Master Settings are done from:

The Master Setup consists of:

Settings Master Settings


MAC ID
Unique address from 0 to 63
Name
Alphanumeric name
Buffered, host controlled option
is selected for Handshake of the
process data
Bus Parameter
Invoked from Settings Bus
Parameters
Used to configure the baud
rate and optimization settings
Use the default settings

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe DeviceNet Interface configuration using SYCON

2/2/2012

55

Honeywell

DeviceNet Master Serial Driver Setup

Sycon Serial Driver supports COM1 to


COM 4 interfaces in the PC

Select Settings Device Assignment:

Select the
Applicable
Serial Port

When the COM Port is selected:

Select the COM port to which the Dnet


Module is connected

Select OK for
Automatic
Network
Scan

The Master is identified by the SyCon


Serial driver
The Master performs an Automatic
Network Scan
The Master identifies and displays the
slave devices found on the network

Select Polling as the chosen


configuration for each slave

Polling is a specific type of function


supported by the device

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe DeviceNet Interface configuration using SYCON

56

28

2/2/2012

Honeywell

Slave Configuration

Select Settings Slave


Configuration to perform the Slave
configuration

Configure Parameter Data

Default values are set and are


available from the EDS file
Channel-specific data can be
configured here by the user

Select the
Device
2

Select / Double click


to customize
Parameters

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe DeviceNet Interface configuration using SYCON

2/2/2012

57

Honeywell

Configuration Download

Select the Master from SYCON

Download the slave configuration


to the Master from:
Online Download
Select the Master to
Download

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe DeviceNet Interface configuration using SYCON

58

29

2/2/2012

MasterLogic Communication Protocols

The modules attached


to Extended SMART
IO (Station-2) are
listed

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Topic: MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Contents

Configure the Profibus communication..................................................................................................3

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication

Configure the Profibus communication


Practice
Objective

The objective of this LAB is to demonstrate the communication between the ML200R PLC
and Smart (Profibus) I/Os with a PMEA module.

This lab is only for reference.

Prerequisites

SoftMaster - MasterLogic Programming software is installed.

Sycon Smart I/O configuration software is installed.

ML200R controller is available with a Profibus Communication module (Pnet) along with
Profibus I/Os and connected to the network.

Switch and network connections are established for the ML200R controller.

Experion Server or Client machine is available with Experion Engineering Tools loaded on
it.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

The procedures mentioned in this lab assume the following:

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication

Detailed Instructions Reference Only

Step

Action

Configure communication settings for Profibus Devices.


1
ATTENTION
This lab is only for reference only and will not be
performed in class.

Open SoftMaster application from Start All Programs SoftMaster SoftMaster.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication

Step
3

Action
From the Project menu in SoftMaster, select Open from PLC

TIP

Open from PLC will upload the project information


from the PLC along with the hardware details.
Open Project will open a previously configured project
in the offline mode.
New Project will create a new project in the offline
mode.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication

Step
4

Action
In Online Settings, select USB as the connection type, and click Connect.

ATTENTION
Connection type can be USB, Extended base USB or
RS-232C with depth Local.
If the connection type selected is RS-232C, then click
the Settings tab and select the COM Port used and
enter the baud rate.
Ethernet Connection cannot be used because FEnet
Module is not yet configured.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication

Step
5

Action
In response to the SoftMaster information dialog box, click OK.

TIP
If the connection is successfully established, the above
dialog box appears.
If the connection is unsuccessful, then an error dialog
box will appear stating Cannot use USB port. Check
the connection state and try again.
If you get an error message, verify the connection
setting and cable connections and retry.

In the Project Window of SoftMaster, double click on I/O Parameter.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication

Step

Action

Check the I/O modules in the I/O Parameter Setting Window

Click OK.

Open the SyCon application from


Start All Programs SyCon System Configurator SyCon.

10

In the SyCon.EXE menu bar select File New.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication
Step

Action

11

In the Select fieldbus dialog box select PROFIBUS

12

Click OK.

13

In the SyCon.EXE menu bar select File Save.

14

In the Save as dialog box enter the File name of Profibus Module configuration and
click Save.

ATTENTION
The file name Profibus Module configuration is used for
class. In a real plant scenario, it can be different.
The default path for the program will be C:\ Program
Files\SyCon\Project. This path can be changed as required.
This file is saved with a .pb extension.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication

Step

Action

15

In the SyCon.EXE menu bar select Insert Master.

16

In the Insert Master dialog box select COM-C-DPM from the Available masters area and
click ADD>>.

ATTENTION
COM-C-DPM is the relevant Master for a ML200R
PLC.

17

10

Click OK.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication
Step

Action

18

In the SyCon.EXE menu bar, select Settings Master Configuration.

19

In the Master Configuration dialog box select Auto addressing and click DP Master
Settings to open the DP Mater settings dialog box.

ATTENTION
The settings specified above are specific to this class.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

11

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication

12

Step

Action

20

In the DP Master Settings window select Buffered, host controlled in the Handshake of
the process data section.

21

Click OK to close the DP Master Settings window.

22

Click OK to close the Master Configuration window.

23

In the SyCon.EXE menu bar select Insert Slave and click in SyCon.EXE window.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication

Step
24

Action
In the Insert Slave dialog box select the following:
Vendor: Honeywell
Select the Available slaves: MPL-D22A/C and MPL-TR2A/B/C
Click ADD>>.

Click OK.

26

In the SyCon.EXE window select Slave1.

25

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

13

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication

14

Step

Action

27

From the menu bar in the SyCon.EXE window, select Settings Slave Configuration.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication
Step

Action

28

In the Slave Configuration window verify the Station address and Assigned master for
all the slaves.

ATTENTION
Station addresses should match with the physical addresses set
by the switches on the modules.
The Address Settings specified above are specific to this class.

2/2/2012

29

Click OK.

30

Repeat steps 26 to 29 for Slave2.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

15

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication

16

Step

Action

31

In the SyCon.EXE window select Master0.

32

In the SyCon.EXE menu bar, select Settings Bus Parameter...

33

In the Bus Parameter dialog box set the Baud rate at 1500 kBits/s and set Optimize at
Standard.

34

Click OK.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication
Step

Action

35

In the SyCon.EXE window menu bar select Settings Device Assignment...

36

In the Device Assignment CIF Serial Driver dialog box select COM 1 and click Connect
COM 1.

37

Click OK in the Device Assignment CIF Serial Driver dialog box

38

In the SyCon.EXE menu bar select Online Download

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

17

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication

Step

Action

39

Click Yes in response to the Question dialog box.

40

Wait for the Master Download process to complete.

41

From the SoftMaster menu bar select Tools Network Manager.

TIP
Network Manager (SoftMaster-NM) is a separate tool
within SoftMaster and is used for configuration of
communication related information.

18

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication
Step

Action

42

From the SoftMaster-NM menu bar select File Open from PLC

43

In Online Settings, select USB as the connection type, and click Connect.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

19

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication

Step
44

Action
Enter the Project name as Profibus Settings and click OK

ATTENTION
The Program name Profibus Settings is used for
class. In a real plant scenario, this can be the name of
the plant or the process it controls.
The default path for the program will be
C:\SoftMaster\. This path can be changed as required.
This project is saved with an .xfg extension. All
Communication settings are stored in this file.

20

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication

Step

Action

45

Wait for the parameters to be read.

46

In the Project window in SoftMaster-NM, ensure that the Pnet Module is present in
Standard settings tab.
Click on High-speed Link tab.
Double click on High-speed Link 01.

47

TIP
The maximum number of High-speed Links is 12.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

21

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication

Step
48

Action
In the Communication Module Settings window, select the following:
Module type: Pnet
Base # : 01
Slot # : 07
Period type: 50msec.

TIP
The settings specified above are specific to this class.

22

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication

Step

Action

49

Click OK.

50

Double-click on Block from the High-speed Link tab in the Project window to open the
block settings window.

51

In the Block window click on any cell.

52

Pnet configuration settings are already done using SyCon software; therefore, the
settings will be uploaded from SyCon to SoftMaster-NM.

Select Online Sycon Upload (Dnet, Pnet) in SoftMaster-NM.

TIP
The settings specified above are specific to this class.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

23

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication

Step
53

Action
Specify the Read area as % MW350 and Write area as %MW355.

ATTENTION
Station 1 corresponds to Slave 1. It is a DI Module
(MPL-D22C)
Station 2 corresponds to Slave 2. It is a DO Module
(MPL-TR2C)
Slave modules used here are 16 channels DI/DO
modules. One channel corresponds to one bit. So for
16 channels, 2 bytes are used for Sending/Receiving
(16 bits).
The settings specified above are specific to this class.

54

24

From the menu bar of SoftMaster-NM select Online Write Parameter to download
the settings.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication
Step

Action

55

Select the High-speed Link 01 as shown.

56

Click OK.

57

Wait for the Write parameter function to finish.

58

From the SoftMaster-NM menu bar select OnlineEnable Link.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

25

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication

26

Step

Action

59

Select High-speed Link 01 and click on Write.

60

Click OK in response to the dialog box.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication

Step
Close the Enable Link dialog box.

61

Action

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

27

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication

Step

Action

Verify the communication for Profibus Modules.


62

From the SoftMaster menu bar select Monitor Address Monitoring.

63

Double-click on M in the address tree of the Address Monitoring window and write data
0000100010101110 in %MW355 (Read Area for PLC1).

ATTENTION
To view a memory address in word format (%MW355)
16 bit from the
select ViewView Options
menu bar in the Address Monitoring window.
To view the values in binary format select
Binary from the menu bar
ViewView Options
in the Address Monitoring window.

28

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication

Step
64

Action
Observe the data on MPL TR2A (DO Module)

ATTENTION
The DO Module has 16 LEDs (one for each bit).
Based on the value (0 or 1) written in each bit, the
LEDs will turn ON or OFF.
65

Write data 1001100111111111 by setting the corresponding channels of MPL D22C


(DI module) and observe the results in the Write area (%MW350) of the PLC.

ATTENTION
The Channel has to be simulated manually or using a
program. The value of channel 0 has to be ON,
channel 1 = OFF, Channel 2 = OFF, Channel 3 = ON
and so on
To view a memory address in word format (%MW355)
16 bit from the
select ViewView Options
menu bar in the Address Monitoring window.
To view values in binary format select
Binary from the menu bar
ViewView Options
in the Address Monitoring window.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

29

MasterLogic Communication Protocols


Configure the Profibus communication

This page was intentionally left blank.

30

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Describe MODBUS

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

Modbus TCP is the most widely used open protocol specification based
on TCP/IP and UDP/IP
MasterLogic PLC provides both Modbus Server (Slave) and Modbus Client
(Master) functions

HMI /SCADA
/DCS etc

Modbus TCP Server (Slave)

Modbus TCP Frame

Modbus TCP Client (Master)

MasterLogic PLC

Request (Command)

Response

Third Party Device.

MasterLogic PLC

Max. 250 bytes of data can be read or written by a single command


Modbus can Read or Write to only direct variable addresses (%I, %Q,
%M, %R) in ML200R PLC

Configure ML200R as Modbus Server/Client


Network

Ethernet

Service
Name

MasterLogic-200R PLC parameters required to be set for MODBUS TCP service


Standard
Parameter

HSL
Parameter

P2P Ch.

P2P Block

User Frame

Modbus Client (Master)

Modbus Server (Slave)

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Remarks

P2P Parameter

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Required
X Not required

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Honeywell

Modbus Serial Server


Snet Interface Module as Modbus Server
Modbus Server

Modbus Client

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Honeywell

Configure Modbus Serial Server


Open SoftMaster-NM
Select Online menu
and click Connect to
connect to the PLC

Modules available on the


ML200R base will appear in
the Project Window

Select Read IO
Information

Double click the Snet


Module to open the
Standard Settings window

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Honeywell

Configure Modbus Serial Server

Depending on type of
client, select:
Ensure that
Channel Type is
selected based on
the hardware type

Modbus ASCII Server


Modbus RTU Server

Any of the two


channels can be
configured as a
Modbus Server

Specify Read and


Write addresses in
Modbus setting of
respective channels

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Modbus Serial Server - Modbus Address Settings

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Honeywell

Snet as a Modbus Server


Writes data to be sent to clients in
the write address area
Client writes response in the read
address area, and the server reads
the response from this location

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Honeywell

Modbus Serial Server Write Configuration to PLC


In Online menu
Select Write Parameter to
write configuration to PLC
Select Snet in the Write
Parameter Standard settings
Click OK

On successful download,
reset the ML200R PLC
Select Online Reset
Reset PLC

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Honeywell

Modbus Serial Client


Snet Interface Module as Modbus Client
Modbus Server

Modbus Client

Station: 2

Station: 1

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Honeywell

Configure Modbus Serial Client


Open SoftMaster-NM
Select Online menu
and click Connect to
connect to the PLC

Select Read IO
Information

Double-click the Snet


Module to open the
Standard Settings Window

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Honeywell

Configure Modbus Serial Client

Ensure the Channel


Type is selected
based on the
hardware type

Select Use P2P settings


to configure Snet as a
Modbus Client

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Modbus Serial Client - P2P Configuration


Select the P2P tab in SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell
Select Snet

Select any P2P slot and


double click to open its
Communication Settings

In the P2P Channel Setting,


select the P2P Driver as
Modbus RTU/Modbus ASCII
client based on the Modbus
Server
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

11

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Honeywell

Modbus Serial Client


Function Code Memory Mapping Table

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Modbus Serial Client - Function Codes

Honeywell

Modbus Function Code 01 (Read Coil Status)

Read address 0x00000


indicates the Function
Code 01

Double-click
P2P Bock

User editable
memory address

Select the data type as BIT


for Function Code 01

Select Single to read


Single Bit or Continuous
to read Multiple Bits

Select Snet
Channel configured
as Modbus Client

Select Destination
station number of
Modbus Server

Select Trigger Flag

Select Modbus
RTU Client

Select P2P function as


Read for Function Code 01

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

13

Modbus Serial Client - Function Codes


Modbus Function Code 05 (Force Single Coil)

Honeywell
Write address
0x00000 indicates
Function Code is 05

User editable
value

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Double-click
P2P Block
Select the data type as BIT
for Function Code 05

Select Single to read Single


Bit or Continuous to read
Multiple Bits

Select Snet
Channel configured
as Modbus Client
Select Modbus
RTU Client

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Select Destination
station number of
Modbus Server

Select Trigger Fag


Select P2P Function as
Read for Function Code 05
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

14

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Modbus Serial Client - Write Configuration to PLC

Honeywell

Select the Online Menu


Click Write Parameter to
Write configuration to PLC
Select Snet in the Write
Parameter standard settings
Select the P2P 01 slot
Click OK

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

15

Modbus Serial Client - Write Configuration to PLC

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Honeywell

Select the Online Menu


Select Enable Link
Enable the P2P 01 slot
Click Write

On successful Write, reset


the ML200R PLC
Select Online Reset
Reset PLC

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

16

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Honeywell

Modbus TCP/IP Server


FEnet Interface Module as Modbus Server

Modbus TCP/IP Client

Modbus Server

Hub

IP address: 200.200.200.200

IP address: 200.200.200.20

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

17

Modbus TCP/IP Server - Configuration

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Honeywell

Open SoftMaster-NM

Select Online menu


and click Connect to
connect to the PLC

Select Read IO
Information

Double click FEnet Module to


open the Standard Settings
Wndow

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

18

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Modbus TCP/IP Server - Configuration

Honeywell

Specify Read and


Write Addresses

Select Modbus TCP/IP


Server as Driver

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

19

Modbus TCP/IP Server - Write Configuration to PLC

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Honeywell

Select Online Menu


Click Write Parameter to
write configuration to PLC
Select FEnet in Write
Parameter Standard settings
Click OK

On successful download,
reset the ML200R PLC
Select Online Reset
Reset PLC

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

20

10

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Honeywell

Modbus TCP/IP Client


FEnet as Modbus Client
Modbus TCP/IP Client

Modbus Server

Hub

IP Address: 200.200.200.30

IP Address: 200.200.200.100

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

21

Modbus TCP/IP Client - Configuration

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Honeywell

Open SoftMaster-NM

Select Online menu


and click Connect to
connect to the PLC

Select Read IO
Information

Double click FEnet


Module to open the
Standard Settings
Window
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

22

11

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Honeywell

Modbus TCP/IP Client - SM NM Configuration

Select MLDP
Server as Driver

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

23

Honeywell

Modbus TCP/IP Client - P2P Configuration


Select P2P tab in SoftMaster-NM

Select FEnet

Select any P2P Slot and


double click to open its
Communication Settings

Open the P2P Channel


settings and select
Modbus TCP Client as
THE P2P Driver

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Enter Modbus Server


IP Address
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

24

12

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Honeywell

Modbus TCP Client - Function Codes


Modbus Function Code 04 (Read Input Registers)

User editable
value

Read address 0x30000


indicates the Function
Code is 04
Double-click
P2P block

Select the data type as


WORD for Function Code 04

Select Single to read single


word or Continuous to read
multiple word values

Select P2P
channel configured
as Modbus client

Select Trigger flag


Select Modbus
TCP client

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Function Code 04 is a
Read function
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

25

Modbus TCP/IP Client - Write Configuration to PLC

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Honeywell

Select Online Menu

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Click Write Parameter to


Write configuration to PLC
Select FEnet in the Write
parameter standard settings
Click OK

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

26

13

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Modbus TCP/IP Client - Write Configuration to PLC

Honeywell

Select Online Menu


Select Enable Link
Enable the P2P 01 slot
Click Write

On successful write, reset


the ML200R PLC
Select Online Reset
Reset PLC

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

27

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

28

14

Describe MODBUS
4/25/2012

Describe the High Speed Link

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Describe the High Speed Link


4/25/2012

29

Honeywell

Introduction

High-speed Link is a communication method between two ML PLCs

ML200R PLC 1

Maximum 128 blocks can be configured per HS link for data transfer
For each Block, specific addresses can be configured to store the transmit
data and received data
ML200R PLC 2

High Speed Link

HS Link Communication Data Capacity


Classification

Maximum
communication
words

Maximum
send words

Maximum
blocks

Maximum
words per
block

2MLL-EFMT

25600

12800

128(0-127)

200

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

30

15

Describe the High Speed Link


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Configure High-Speed Link


Communication Modules for
High-speed Links:
FEnet (explained in this
module)
Pnet
Dnet

In SoftMaster-NM

Connect to ML200R PLC


Open the FEnet module
Standard Settings window
Verify that the IP Address
associated with the FEnet
Module is correct
Write the configuration to
ML200R PLC
Reset ML200R PLC

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the High Speed Link


4/25/2012

31

Honeywell

Configure HS Link Parameters


In SoftMaster-NM, select the High-speed Link Tab
12 HS links are available
for configuration

Double click the HS Link to


open the Communication
Module Settings Window

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

32

16

Describe the High Speed Link


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Configure Communication Module Settings

Select the Module


Type, Base Number
and Slot Number

Select the appropriate


communication period

HS Link Block settings


window opens

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

33

Describe the High Speed Link


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Configure HS Link Block Settings

Select the Station type


Master for the FEnet Module
(Slave function is not
supported for HS link)

Select Mode
for the Block

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

34

17

Describe the High Speed Link


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Configure HS Link Block Settings (continued)


Configure a Send Block

Memory Address
location of the data to
be transmitted

Station Number of the


transmitting FEnet
Module

Size of the data to be


transmitted in WORD Units

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the High Speed Link


4/25/2012

35

Honeywell

Configure HS Link Block Settings (continued)


Configure Receive Block
Memory Address
location to store the
received data

Station Number of the


transmitting FEnet
Module

Size of the data


received in
WORD Units

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

36

18

Describe the High Speed Link


4/25/2012

Download HS Link Parameters to PLC

Honeywell

In SoftMaster-NM, select Online Write Parameters (Standard


Settings, HS Link, P2P)

Select the configured


High-speed Link to
download and click OK

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

37

Describe the High Speed Link


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Enable HS Link Parameters

Select the
High-speed
Link and click
Write

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

38

19

Describe the High Speed Link


4/25/2012

In SoftMaster-NM, select Online Enable Link (HS Link, P2P)

Honeywell

HS Link Communication
Station #1 Block configuration

In the case of SEND


Mode, the Station# is
grayed out
Block 1
(%MW200 ~ %MW231)

Station #1
Block 0 (%MW100 ~ %MW115)

OK

OK

Station #2

Station #5
Station #5 receives data from
Block 0 of Station 1
Station #5 Block configuration

Ignore
OK

Station #3

OK

Ignore
Station #4 is not configured to
receive data from any Block

Station #4
Station #3 Block Configuration

Station #3 receives both Block 0


& 1 data from Station #1

Depending on the Block Configuration of


the receiving station, Data Blocks from the
Master Station are accepted or ignored by
the receiving station

Station #2 Block configuration

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

39

Describe the High Speed Link


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Monitor HS Link
In SoftMaster-NM
Click Online System Diagnosis

Right click on the FEnet


Module and select
Status by Service

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

40

20

Describe the High Speed Link


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Monitor HS Link
Select the HS Link Service tab to view the status of HS Links

Note that the


HS Link LED
on the FEnet
Module is ON

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

41

Describe the High Speed Link


4/25/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

42

21

Describe the High Speed Link


4/25/2012

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

43

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

Peer to Peer communication is used to communicate between two ML


PLC or third party devices
FEnet Interface module supports six P2P commands
Read, Write, Send, Receive, ESend and EReceive

Snet interface module supports four P2P commands


Read, Write, Send, Receive

Both FEnet and Snet modules support 8 P2P parameters with 64 blocks
for each parameter
User frame definition
Used to create the frame as per communication
requirement of the destination module

Email
Email notification for events such as:
PLC mode changes
Occurrence of errors

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

44

22

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication


4/25/2012

P2P Master Controller FEnet Configuration

Honeywell

Open SoftMaster-NM
Connect to PLC
Click Read I/O
Information

Double-click to
open standard
settings window
Select Modbus TCP/IP
server as driver if
Modbus TCP
communication is to be
used for P2P

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

45

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Configure P2P Parameter

Configure P2P settings for FEnet module if controller is acting as Master


in P2P communication

In SoftMaster-NM, click P2P parameter tab

Double-click to open
Communication
Module setting
window

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

46

23

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Configure P2P Parameter for FEnet Module


Communication Module Setting

Select FEnet
module. Verify the
Base number and
Slot number are
correct.

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Double click
Channel to open
the Channel
setting window

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

47

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Configure P2P Parameter for FEnet Module


Channel Setting

Modbus TCP/IP driver is used to communicate with the third party devices
supporting Modbus protocol
User Frame definition driver is used to send user defined frames
MLDP client is used for communicating to the ML200 FEnet I/F Modules

Two channels are


configured for two
different P2P Drivers

Select P2P Driver


as per
requirement

FEnet Driver
is selected as
Modbus TCP/IP
Server

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Select the IP Address


of the device to
communicate
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

48

24

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Configure P2P Parameter for FEnet Module


Block Settings of FEnet from the P2P 01 link
For Modbus TCP/IP driver Read and Write
P2P functions are available

Driver Settings are


populated directly
depending upon
channel selected

Select Single to read single


value and Continuous to
read multiple values

Select the
Channel
number
configured

Used to trigger
the
communication

User frame definition


driver is used for the
devices that do not
support Modbus
TCP/IP protocol

For Modbus TCP/IP


driver BIT and WORD
data types are
available

For user frame


definition driver Send
and Receive P2P
functions are available

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

49

Configure P2P Parameter for FEnet Module

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Block Settings
Activated when Continuous is selected in
Command type. Enter the number of
values to read

Select the already


defined frame

Memory settings

Address settings for


Write operation

Address settings for


Read operation

Area of the
communicating
device to Read

Enter the address


containing the
data to be
transmitted

Enter the
address to save
the read data

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

50

25

Area of the
communicating
device to Write

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication


4/25/2012

Download P2P Configuration to PLC

Honeywell

Click Online Write Parameter

Select FEnet
and P2P parameter
to be downloaded
and click OK

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

51

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Enable P2P Parameter Link


Click Online Enable Link

Select P2P parameter


to be enabled
and click Write

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

52

26

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication


4/25/2012

P2P Slave Controller FEnet Configuration

Honeywell

Open SoftMaster-NM
Connect to PLC

Click Read I/O


Information

Double-click to
open standard
settings window
Select Modbus TCP/IP
server as driver if
Modbus TCP
communication is to be
used for P2P

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

53

No need to
configure P2P
settings for
interface module
on a controller
acting as P2P
slave

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Monitor P2P Parameter


Open SoftMaster-NM

Click Online System Diagnosis

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

54

27

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication


4/25/2012

P2P Master Controller Snet Configuration

Honeywell

Open SoftMaster-NM
Connect to PLC
Click Read I/O
Information

Ensure that Use P2P


settings is selected as
Active mode

Double click
to open standard
settings window

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

55

Configure P2P Parameter for Snet module

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Configure P2P settings for Snet module if controller is acting as Master


in P2P communication

Select the P2P driver as


per requirement

Double click to open


P2P Channel settings

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

56

28

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication


4/25/2012

Configure P2P Parameter for Snet Module

Honeywell

Configure P2P parameter block


Select the station
number of the device
to communicate

For Modbus client driver,


Read and Write P2P
functions are available

For User frame


definition driver, Send
and Receive P2P
functions are available

If selected, the
destination station
number is fixed

If the destination station checkbox is unchecked, the destination station


number is read from PLC memory location which can be varied to
change the destination station number

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

57

Download P2P Configuration of to PLC

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Click Online Write Parameter

Select Snet and


P2P parameter to
be downloaded and
click OK

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

58

29

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Enable P2P Parameter Link


Click Online Enable Link

Select P2P parameter


to be enabled
and click Write

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

59

P2P Slave Controller Snet Configuration

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Open SoftMaster-NM
Connect to PLC
Click Read I/O
Information

No need to
configure P2P
settings for
interface module
on a controller
acting as P2P
slave

Double click
to open standard
settings window

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Select Modbus ASCII


server if Modbus
protocol is used for
P2P communication

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

60

30

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Monitor P2P Parameter


Open SoftMaster-NM
Click Online System Diagnosis

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication


4/25/2012

61

Honeywell

Configuring User Frame Definition

Enter the Group


name and select
the Frame type

Group consist of frames having identical header


and tail
Frame type decides whether the frame is to be
transmitted or received
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

62

31

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication


4/25/2012

In SoftMaster-NM, right click on User Frame Definition and click Add


Group

Honeywell

Configuring User Frame Definition


Every frame consist of a Head, Body, and Tail

Each Head, Body, and Tail comprised of data in form of segments

Add Frames to group


Right-click the group and select Add Frame
Click Add Frame each time
when you add a frame

1
2

Enter the name of the body frame


and click OK

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

63

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Configuring User Frame Definition


After adding the frames, the frames appear in project window

Right click in edit


frame window of
Test and click
Add Segment

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

64

32

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Configuring User Frame Definition


Segments are added
from the Frame edit
window

Right click on Frame


edit window of Test
and click Add
Segment

Add one Numerical


Constant segment
and one String
Constant segment

For FEnet module,


three types of
segments can be
added to frame

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

For Snet module, four


types of segments can
be added to frame

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

65

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Types of segments
Numerical Constant
Data is in form of constant numeric value
Data is specified as Hex value

String Constant

Data is in form of constant string value


Data is specified as ASCII characters

Fixed Size Variable


Used to send the fixed size frame

Define the size


of the frame
for Fixed size
variable

Variable Sized Variable


Used to send variable sized frame

Define the size of the frame while


configuring P2P block in case of
Variable sized variable
MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

66

33

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication


4/25/2012

Honeywell
Configuring User Frame Definition
After adding the segments, the segments appear in the Frame Edit
window

Open the Block Configuration window and select the defined frame in
the Frame column
Block Configuration of FEnet module

Block Configuration of Snet module

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

67

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication


4/25/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

68

34

Describe Peer-to-Peer Communication


4/25/2012

Topic: MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Contents
Configure a MODBUS Server ................................................................................................................3
Configure a MODBUS Client ...............................................................................................................29

Configure the High Speed Link............................................................................................................53

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Server

Configure a MODBUS Server


Objective
The objective of this lab is to demonstrate the MODBUS Server Communication using Modbus
TCP Protocol established between the ML200R PLC and the MODBUS device.
Pre-requisites

SoftMaster MasterLogic Programming software tool

Modbus Simulator (MDBUS.exe) available and

ML200R controller with FEnet Module connected to the network

Switch and network connections established to the ML200R controller

Introduction
The communication between the ML PLC and a Modbus device (simulated) is established by
configuring MODBUS Server settings in SoftMaster and SoftMaster NM.
SoftMaster is the ML200R Programming Software.

SoftMaster NM is software tool, under SoftMaster, used for configuration of the


communication related parameters.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Server

Partition Sheet

Item

Value to be Entered

FEnet Module A-side IP address


FEnet Module B-side IP address
FEnet Module A-side HS link
Station No.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Server

Detailed Instructions

Step

Action

Configure MLPLC as Modbus Server


Open SoftMaster from Start All Programs SoftMaster SoftMaster.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Server

Step
2

Action
From the Project Menu in SoftMaster, select New Project.

TIP
Open from PLC will upload the project information from
the PLC along with the hardware details.
Open Project will open a previously configured project in
the offline mode.
New Project will create a new project in the offline mode.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Server

Step
3

Action
Enter Project Name as Modbus_Comm

Click OK

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Server

Step
4

Action
From the SoftMaster menu, select Tools Network Manager.

TIP
Network Manager (SoftMaster-NM) is a separate tool
within SoftMaster and is used for configuration of
communication parameters.

From the SoftMaster-NM menu bar, select File Open from PLC.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Server

Step
6

Action
In Online Settings, select USB as the connection type, and click Connect.

ATTENTION
Connection type can be USB, Extended base USB or
RS-232C with depth Local.

If the connection type selected is RS-232C, then click


the Settings tab and select the COM Port used and
enter the baud rate.
Ethernet Connections cannot be used because FEnet
Module is not yet configured.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Server

Step
7

Action
Enter the following Project name: FEnet Settings
Change the File directory to C:\SoftMaster\FEnet Settings

ATTENTION
The Program name FEnet Settings is used for our
class. In a real plant scenario this could be the name
of the plant or process it controls.
The default path for the program will be
C:\SoftMaster\. This path can be changed as required.
This projects filename is saved with an .xfg extension.
All communication settings are stored in this file.
8

10

Click OK.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Server
Step

Action

Wait for the parameters to be read from the PLC.

10

Double-click on FEnet in the Project window to configure properties for the FEnet
module.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

11

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Server

Step
11

Action
Set the IP address, HS link Station No. and select the Driver Modbus TCP/IP Server
for the A-side in TCP/IP settings.

TIP
Refer the partition sheet at the start of the lab for your
HS Link Station Number and IP address.

12

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Server

Step
12
13

Action
Click on Modbus Settings in the Driver (server) Settings area of the Standard Settings
dialog box.
In Modbus Settings dialog box enter the following:
Bit read area Address: %MX10
Bit write area Address: %MX50
Word read area Address: %MW10
Word write area Address: %MW100

ATTENTION

The Modbus Settings specified above are used for this


class. In a real plant, this can be different.

4/25/2012

14

Click OK.

15

Repeat step 15 and 18 for a redundant FEnet by selecting the B-side tab.

16

When finished, click OK on the Standard Settings dialog box.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

13

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Server

14

Step

Action

17

From the menu bar of SoftMaster-NM, select Online Write Parameter to download
the settings to the PLC.

18

You may encounter a warning message as shown below. Click Yes to continue.

19

Check the FEnet [base0, slot0] option.

20

Click OK.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Server
Step

Action

21

Wait for writing of the parameters to be completed.

22

In response to the following dialog box, click on OK.

23

From the SoftMaster-NM menu bar select Online Reset Reset Individual Module.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

15

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Server

16

Step

Action

24

Wait for the read process to complete.

25

Check the FEnet Settings and Click OK.

26

Wait for module to be reset.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Server

Step
27

Action
Open the Simulator by clicking on MDBUS.

ATTENTION
If necessary, consult your instructor for help with this activity.
MDBUS is an executable and must be present and running

In the Mdbus About window, click OK.

29

From the Mdbus Main menu bar click on Configuration.

28

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

17

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Server

Step

Action

30

In the Mdbus Configuration window select Master for the Mode and Modbus Slave No.1.
Enter the following in the Internet Protocol Communications section:
IP Comm. Enable: enabled (checked)
IP Addr.: IP address same as set for the MLPLC
IP Modbus: RTU TCP
Enter the following in the Database Points section
Click OK

ATTENTION
The Modbus Slave number should be the same as the HS
Link Station number specified in FEnet Standard Settings.
Note that Modbus Configuration page must have a Poll Delay
specified. Poll Delay field cannot be blank. In lab we will keep
the Poll Delay as 2.

18

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Server

Step

Action

Verify the communication between MLPLC and Mdbus Simulator using Modbus TCP/IP server.
Click on the Display menu on the Mdbus Main window and then click on Mdbus Coils,
Mdbus Status, Mdbus Input Registers and Mdbus Holding Registers to open
windows for observing the results.

32

Start the simulator by clicking the On menu item from the Mdbus Main window

31

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

19

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Server

Step
33

Action
Note the communication status.

ATTENTION
If communication is established between the simulator
and the MLPLC, then Comm. -Nrml will appear in the
window.
If there is no communication between the simulator
and the MLPL, then Comm. -Fail will appear in the
window.
34

20

From the Mdbus Main window menu click on Control to enter data to send to the
MLPLC.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Server
Step

Action

35

Enter the Pt. No. 1 and Value(s) 1 in Coils and click on Send.

36

Enter Pt. No. 1 and Value(s) 222 in Holding Regs. and click on Send.

37

Observe the data in the Mdbus Coils and Mdbus Holding Regs. windows.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

21

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Server

Step
38

Action
Next, we will observe the results in the Write Memory Area (%MX50) of the MLPLC.
From the SoftMaster menu bar, select Monitor Address Monitoring.

22

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Server

Step

Action

39

In the Address monitoring window, double click on M in the address tree and observe the
value in %MX50 (Bit Write Area for the PLC).

ATTENTION
To view values in bit format (%MX50) select
1 bit from the menu bar
ViewView Options
in the Address Monitoring window.
To view values in hexadecimal format select

ViewView Options
Hexadecimal from the
menu bar in the Address Monitoring window.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

23

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Server

Step
40

Action
Observe the value in %MW100 (Word Write Area for the PLC).

ATTENTION
To view values in word format (%MW100) select
16 bit from the menu bar
ViewView Options
in the Address Monitoring window.
To view values in decimal format select
ViewView Options
Unsigned Decimal from
the menu bar in the Address Monitoring window.

24

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Server

Step
41

Action
Write data in the bit read area of MLPLC (%MX10).

ATTENTION
To view memory addresses in bit format (%MX10)
1 bit from the
select ViewView Options
menu bar in the Address Monitoring window.
To view values in hexadecimal format select

ViewView Options
Hexadecimal from the
menu bar in the Address Monitoring window.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

25

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Server

Step
42

Action
Write data in the word read area of MLPLC (%MW10).

ATTENTION
To view memory addresses in word format (%MW10)
16 bit from the
select ViewView Options
menu bar in the Address Monitoring window.
To view values in decimal format select
ViewView Options
Unsigned Decimal from
the menu bar in the Address Monitoring window.

26

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Server

Step

Observe the values in the simulator Mdbus Status and Mdbus Input Registers.

43

Action

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

27

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Server

This page was intentionally left blank.

28

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Client

Configure a MODBUS Client


Practice
Objective
The objective of this LAB is to demonstrate the communication between ML200R PLC and the
Modbus simulator when ML200R PLC is configured as Modbus Client.
Prerequisites

SoftMaster is installed

ML200R controller is connected to the network

Introduction
In this lab you will configure the ML200R as a MODBUS Client.

The simulator is configured and used for demonstrating MODBUS communication with the
ML200R.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

29

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Client

Partition Sheet

Item

Value to be Entered

FEnet Module A-side IP address


FEnet Module B-side IP address
FEnet Module A-side HS link
Station No.
Modbus Simulator Address

30

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Client

Procedure

Step

Action

Configure MLPLC as Modbus Client


Open SoftMaster from Start All Programs SoftMaster SoftMaster.

From the Project Menu in SoftMaster, select New Project

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

31

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Client

Step
3

Action
On New Project Window, enter the Project Name as P2P Config.
Leave other settings as default.
Click OK.

32

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Client

Step
4

Action
From the SoftMaster menu bar select Tools Network Manager.

TIP
Network Manager (SoftMaster-NM) is a separate tool
within SoftMaster and is used for configuration of
communication related information.

From the SoftMaster-NM menu bar select File Open from PLC

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

33

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Client

Step
6

34

Action
In Online Settings, select USB as the connection type, and click Connect.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Client

Step
7

Action
Enter the Project name: P2P Settings
Change the File directory to C:\SoftMaster\P2P Settings
Leave the other settings to default and click OK.

ATTENTION
Program name P2P Settings is used for this class. In a real
plant setting, this can be the name of the plant or process it
controls.
The default path for the program is C:\SoftMaster\ <Project
Name>. This path can be changed as required.
The project file is saved with an .xfg extension. All
communication settings are stored in this file.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

35

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Client

36

Step

Action

Wait for the parameters to be read from the PLC.

Double-click on the FEnet Module (in Base00) from Standard settings tab in the Project
window.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Client

Step

Set the IP address and HS link Station No for the A-side in TCP/IP settings.

10

Action

TIP
Refer to your partition sheet at the start of the lab for
the HS Link Station No and IP address.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

37

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Client

Step

Action

11

Set the IP Address and HS Station No. for the redundant FEnet by selecting the B-side
tab.

12

Click OK.

13

Select the P2P tab from the Project window and double-click on P2P 01.

TIP
The maximum number of P2P links is 08.

38

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Client

Step
14

Action
In the Communication Module Settings dialog box, select the following:
Type: FEnet
Base: 00
Slot: 00

TIP
The settings specified above are specific to this class.
Click OK.

16

From the P2P tab, double click on P2P Channel to open the block settings window.

15

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

39

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Client

Step
17

Action
In the P2P Channel Settings dialog box, select/enter the following:
Channel: 0
P2P Driver: Modbus TCP Client
Partner IP address: Enter the IP address of the Modbus Simulator (Refer to your
partition sheet at the start of the lab)

ATTENTION
Make sure that the windows firewall on PC is turned off or
add the modbus.exe to firewall exceptions list.

40

18

Click OK.

19

In the P2P tab, double click on P2P Block.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Client

Step
20

Action
In the P2P Block Setting dialog box, set the parameters for the BIT data type as shown:
P2P function

Trigger flag

Command
type

Data type

Data size

READ

_T1S

Single

BIT

WRITE

_T1S

Single

BIT

READ

_T1S

Continuous

WORD

16

WRITE

_T1S

Continuous

WORD

16

TIP
Note that a valid Dst St and Dst St # must be entered.
The Dst St # is the Modbus Slave Number.
In the P2P Block Settings dialog box, click on Setting for the P2P function READ and
Data type BIT.

21

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

41

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Client

42

Step

Action

22

In the Variable Setting dialog box, enter the Write area as %MX10 and click OK.

23

In the P2P Block Settings dialog box, click on Setting for the P2P function WRITE and
Data type BIT.

24

In the Variable Settings dialog box, enter the Read area as %MX11 and click OK.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Client
Step

Action

25

In the P2P Block Settings dialog box, click on Setting for the P2P function READ and
Data type WORD.

26

In the Variable Settings dialog box, enter the Write area as %MW100 and click OK.

27

In the P2P Block Settings dialog box, click on Setting for the P2P function WRITE and
Data type WORD.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

43

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Client

44

Step

Action

28

In the Variable Settings dialog box, enter the Read area as %MW200 and click OK.

29

From the menu bar of SoftMaster-NM, select Online Write Parameter to download
the settings.

30

You will encounter a warning message as shown below. Click Yes to continue.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Client
Step

Action

31

In the Write parameters dialog box, select P2P 01.

32

Click OK.

33

Wait for writing of the parameters to complete.

34

From the menu bar of SoftMaster-NM select Online Enable Link (HS Link, P2P) to
download the settings.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

45

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Client

Step

Action

35

Enable Link dialog box appears. Select the P2P01 checkbox and click Write.

36

Acknowledge the SoftMaster-NM dialog Box and click OK.

Close Enable Link dialog box.

46

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Client

Step
37

Action
Close SoftMaster-NM.

Verify the communication between MLPLC and Mdbus Simulator using Modbus TCP Client
38

Open the Simulator by double clicking on MDBUS.exe

TIP

4/25/2012

39

In the Mdbus About dialog box, click OK.

40

To configure parameters, click Configuration on the main menu.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Right-click MDBUS.exe and select Run As


Administrator

47

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Client

Step
41

Action
Select the Mode as Slave and the Modbus Slave No.
Modbus Slave No. must be the same as that of the HS Link Station No.

ATTENTION
The Modbus Slave No. should be the same as the HS Link
Station No. specified in the FEnet Module Configuration.
42

Select the IP Comm. Enable option and Internet Protocol as RTU TCP.

43

In Database Points, set the Number of Coils and Status as 10.


Enter Input Registers and Holding Registers as 16.

48

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Client
Step

Action

44

Click OK.

45

To start the Simulator, click On in the menu bar.

46

Observe the communication status.

47

Select Monitor Address Monitoring from the SoftMaster menu bar.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

49

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Client

Step
48

Action
Enter data (1) in bit read area (%MX11) of the MLPLC.

ATTENTION
To view memory addresses in bit format (%MX11)
1 bit from the
select ViewView Options
menu bar in the Address Monitoring window.
To view the values in hexadecimal format select
ViewView Options
Hexadecimal from the
menu bar in the Address Monitoring window.
49

50

In the Simulator menu bar, select Displays Coils.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Client

Step

Action

50

Ensure the data (1) from the ML PLC is present in address 00001 of the Simulator.

51

Enter data (66) in the WORD read area (%MW200) of MLPLC.

ATTENTION
To view memory addresses in word format (%MW200)
16 bit from the
select ViewView Options
menu bar in the Address Monitoring window.
To view the values in decimal format select

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

ViewView Options
Unsigned Decimal from
the menu bar in the Address Monitoring window.

51

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure a MODBUS Client

52

Step

Action

52

In the Simulator menu bar, select Displays Holding Regs.

53

Ensure that the data (66) from the ML PLC is present in register 00001 of the simulator.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure the High Speed Link

Configure the High Speed Link


Practice
Objective
The objective of this lab is to establish a communication between two MasterLogic200R (ML200R)
Controllers using a high speed link.
Prerequisites

SoftMaster (MasterLogic programming software) is installed and configured.

Two ML200R controllers are available and connected to the network.

Network connections are established for both ML200R controllers.

Introduction
In this lab you will perform the following:

SoftMaster is the ML200R Programming Software

SoftMaster-NM is used to configure communication related parameters

Change the data in the Write area of PLC1 and check whether it appears in the Read area of
PLC2 and vice versa.

Configure both PLCs using SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM (Network Manager)

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

53

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure the High Speed Link

Partition Sheet
Item

Value to be Entered

FEnet Module A-side IP Address


FEnet Module A-side HS link Station no.
Peer controller (PLC2) FEnet Module Aside IP Address
Peer controller (PLC2) FEnet Module Aside HS link Station no.

54

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure the High Speed Link

Procedures

Step

Action

Configure communication settings for High Speed Link


1
ATTENTION
This lab is performed on Physical Hardware. Students
must perform this lab sequentially (one at a time).
Check with the instructor and ensure that the controller
is free before performing this lab.

Open SoftMaster from Start Programs SoftMaster SoftMaster.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

55

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure the High Speed Link

Step
3

Action
From the Project Menu in SoftMaster, select New Project.

TIP
Open from PLC will upload the project information
from the PLC along with the hardware details.
Open Project will open a previously configured project
in the offline mode.
New Project will create a new project in the offline
mode.

56

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure the High Speed Link

Step
4

Action
In New Project Window, enter Project name as High Speed Link Config.
Leave the other entries as default.

Click OK.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

57

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure the High Speed Link

Step
5

Action
From the SoftMaster menu bar select Tools Network Manager.

TIP
Network Manager (SoftMaster-NM) is a separate tool
within SoftMaster and is used for configuration of
communication related information.

58

Using the SoftMaster-NM menu bar, select File Open from PLC

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure the High Speed Link

Step
7

Action
In Online Settings, select USB as the connection type, and click Connect.

ATTENTION
Connection type can be USB, extended base USB or
RS-232C with depth local.
If the connection type selected is RS-232C, then click
the Settings tab and select the COM Port used and
enter the baud rate.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Ethernet connections cannot be used because FEnet


Module is not yet configured.

59

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure the High Speed Link

Step
8

Action
Enter the Project name and select the path for the File Directory as shown below.
Click OK when finished.

ATTENTION
The Program name FEnet Settings is used for our
class. In a real plant scenario, this could be the name
of the plant or process it controls.
The default path for the program will be
C:\SoftMaster\. This path can be changed as required.
This projects filename is saved with an .xfg extension.
All communication settings are stored in this file.

60

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure the High Speed Link
Step

Action

Wait for the parameters to be read from the PLC.

10

Double-click on FEnet in the Project window to configure properties for the FEnet
module.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

61

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure the High Speed Link

Step
11

Action
Set the IP address and HS link Station No for the A-side in TCP/IP Settings.

TIP
Refer to your partition sheet at the start of the lab for
the HS Link Station Number and IP address.

62

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure the High Speed Link

Step

Action

12

Set the IP Address and HS Station No. for the redundant FEnet by selecting the B-side
tab.

13

Click OK when finished.

14

Select the High-speed Link tab from the Project Window and double-click on Highspeed Link 01.

TIP

The maximum number of high-speed links is 12.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

63

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure the High Speed Link

Step
15

Action
In the Communication Module Settings window, select the following:
Module type: FEnet
Base # : 00
Slot # : 00
Period type: 20msec
Leave all other parameters to the default values.

TIP
The settings specified above are specific to this class.

16

64

Click OK.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure the High Speed Link

Step

Action

17

Double-click on Block from the High-speed Link Tab in the Project Window to open the
Block Settings Window.

18

In this example MLPLC1 is going to send/receive data to/from Peer PLC2.


Enter the following settings for MLPLC1.
1. For Send Mode:
Station type: Master
Mode: Send
Block:1
Read Area: %MW100
Read Area word size: 12
2. For Receive Mode:
Station type: Master
Mode: Receive
Station #: 2 (Peer PLC Station No.)
Block:1
Write Area: %MW200

Write Area word size: 12

TIP
The settings specified are specific to this class.
The number of data blocks can be 0 to 31.
The Read/ Write area word size can be 0 to 200.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

65

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure the High Speed Link

66

Step

Action

19

From the menu bar of SoftMaster-NM, select Online Write Parameter to download
the settings.

20

Click yes on a SoftMaster-NM window and acknowledge the message as shown below.

21

Select the checkbox shown for the Standard Settings and High-speed Link.

22

Click OK.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure the High Speed Link
Step

Action

23

Wait for the PLC to complete writing the parameters.

24

Click OK in response to the SoftMaster-NM dialog box.

25

From the SoftMaster-NM menu bar select Online Reset Reset Individual Module.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

67

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure the High Speed Link

Step

Action

26

Wait until reading module information is complete.

27

Select the FEnet Settings checkboxes for Individual module reset and Click OK.

28

Wait for the module reset to be complete.

TIP
If you have connected to the PLC using the same
FENet module and there is no other communication
module present in the Base, the individual module
reset operation fails and a dialog box called Selected
item does not exist appears.
In this case, in SoftMaster-NM menu, click Online
Reset ResetPLC. This will reset the PLC. Reconnect
to the PLC in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM window.

68

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure the High Speed Link
Step

Action

29

From the SoftMaster-NM menu bar select Online Enable Link.

30

Select the High-speed Link 01 and click Write.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

69

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure the High Speed Link

70

Step

Action

31

Click OK in response to the SoftMasterNM dialog box.

32

Click Close in the Enable Link Window.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure the High Speed Link

Step
33

Action
Repeat steps 1 to 34 for peer PLC2.
TIP
Refer to the Partition sheet at the start of the lab for IP
Address and HS Station No for peer PLC2.

Verify the communication between the two PLCs using High Speed Link
From the SoftMaster menu bar, select Monitor Address Monitoring.

34

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

71

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure the High Speed Link

Step
35

Action
Double-click on M in the address tree in the Address Monitoring window and write the
data 0333 in %MW100 (Read Area for PLC1).

ATTENTION
To view memory addresses in word format (%MW100)
16 bit from the
select ViewView Options
menu bar in the Address Monitoring window.
To view the values in hexadecimal format select
ViewView Options
Hexadecimal from the
menu bar in the Address Monitoring window.

72

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure the High Speed Link

Step

Action

36

Observe the data 0333 being written in the write area (%MW200) in Peer PLC2.

37

Write the data 0222 in the Read area (%MW100) of Peer PLC2.

38

Observe the data 0222 being written in the Write area (%MW200) of PLC1.

ATTENTION
To view memory addresses in word format (%MW100)
16 bit from the
select ViewView Options
menu bar in the Address Monitoring window.
To view values in hexadecimal format select

ViewView Options
Hexadecimal from the
menu bar in the Address Monitoring window.

4/25/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

73

MODBUS - High Speed Link Comm Using MasterLogic


Configure the High Speed Link

This page was intentionally left blank.

74

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

4/25/2012

Describe Various Online Functionalities in


SoftMaster

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Honeywell

Introduction

Online functions are the operations which can be done after establishing a
connection with the PLC
The following are online functions:

Change Mode of PLC


Read from PLC
Write to PLC
Compare with PLC
Flash Memory Setting
Control Redundancy
Reset PLC
Clearing PLC data
PLC Information
PLC History
PLC Error/Warning
I/O Information
Force I/O Setting
Skip I/O Setting
Fault Mask
Module Changing Wizard
Base Changing Wizard
Online Editing

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Online Functions
Change Mode

Used to change the operation mode of the PLC


While performing mode changes from SoftMaster, ensure that the PLCs key
switch is in REMOTE (REM) mode
Can be used only when the Program in the PLC is the same program in the
current project in SoftMaster

Read

Used to transfer user programs, parameters, and comments from the PLC to
the current project in SoftMaster

Write

Used to transfer user programs, parameters, and comments from the current
project in SoftMaster to the PLC

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Online Functions - Compare with PLC

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Used to compare the project in the PLC with the project currently open
in SoftMaster
Comparison results are displayed in the Results tab of the Message Window

Select the
parameters
to be
compared
and click
Compare

Project in
PLC

Comparison
results

Current project
open in
SoftMaster

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Online Functions - Flash Memory Settings

When the operation mode of the PLC is changed to RUN, the PLC
copies the program to flash memory as a backup

When selected, the program


is copied to flash memory
after download or online
editing. Also, the program
can be recovered from flash
memory if the program
memory becomes corrupted.

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

When selected, the


program is not copied
to flash memory after
download or online
editing.

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Online Functions - Control Redundancy


Allows switchover between the Redundant CPUs
Standby CPU mode

If the PLC is in the RUN mode, then the STOP option is selected by default.
When the Change button is selected, the mode of the PLC changes to
STOP.
If the PLC is in the STOP mode, then the RUN option is selected by default.
When the Change button is selected, the mode of the PLC changes to RUN.

Select Change to
switchover to the
standby CPU

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Used to Reset
Standby CPU
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Online Functions - Reset PLC


Used to reset the PLC
The PLC is turned OFF and turned ON again

Deletes all
error/warning
information

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Deletes error/warning
information, latch area
data, skip I/O settings,
error mask and forced
I/O settings

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Online Functions - Clear PLC

Clears user programs, parameters, comments, memory and latch area


in the PLC

Selects
All

Deselects
All

Select items to
clear

Select the
individual memory
locations to be
cleared

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Online Functions - PLC Information


Used to view information regarding the connected PLC
Displays CPU Information

Details of
CPU

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Online Functions - PLC Information


CPU Performance

Displays the scan


time of the
connected PLC

Shows the details


of programs
downloaded to
PLC and their
memory
consumption

Memory
used by
programs

Memory used by
comments

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Online Functions - PLC Information


PLCRTC

Password

Used to set the real time clock


(RTC) of the PLC
Users can specify the time or the
PLC can be synchronized with the
PC clock

Users can password-protect


PLC information
Remember or document the
password entered

If multiple SoftMaster instances


are connected to the PLC, only
the first SoftMaster instance
can synchronize the PLC with
the PC clock

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

11

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Online Functions - PLC History

Displays the history of errors/warnings, mode changes, shutdown log

Displays
Error log

Reads PLC History


Deletes PLC History

Displays details of
the selected error
and a remedy to
correct it

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Saves PLC
History to a
.csv file
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Online Functions - PLC History

Displays the base


number where the
power shutdown
occurred

Mode Change Log of


the PLC

Shut down Log

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

13

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Online Functions - PLC History


System Log
Displays the history of tasks run by SoftMaster

By default, 100 log entries are shown

Select Read All to view more entries

If the number of items is


less than 100, this option
is disabled.

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

14

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Online Functions - PLC Error/Warning


Displays Error/Warnings and Error Logs in the PLC

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

15

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Online Functions - I/O Information

View the details of I/O Modules


Used to synchronize the parameters of I/O Modules to that of the I/O
parameters in the SoftMaster project

Activated only
when the PLC is in
the STOP mode

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

16

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Online Functions - Forced I/O Setup


Forced I/O Setup
Enables forcing of I/Os and sets the value of the forced I/O
To select the
module, specify the
Base and Slot
number

Used to enable or
disable the force I/O
functionality

Click to select the


channel
Click to Change the
value to 1

Flag : Used to select the channel


to be forced:
Channel not selected
Channel selected
Data: Value which is forced to the
channel. It can be either 1 or 0
Channel value is 0
Channel value is 1

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

17

Online Functions - Forced I/O Settings

Used to pass the


forced values to the
field devices

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Used to clear the


forced values
applied to the field
devices

To clear all Forced


IO together

Displays
addresses that
have been forced

Displays the variable


names for the
addresses

To clear force
applied on
selected registers

In Program Monitoring, forced input values are displayed but forced


output values are not displayed
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

18

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell

Forced IO Behavior
Scenario 1:

Force Output: Enabled


Force functionality for IO channel: Enabled ( )
Forced value applied for particular channel is passed to the field

Scenario 2:
Forced Output: Disabled
Force functionality for IO channel: Enabled ( )
Forced value applied to the field device is removed
Configured force value in the Force I/O Setup window must be cleared
manually using the Delete or Delete All option
Enable or disable
Force functionality
for Output modules

Enable or disable
Force functionality
for IO channel

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Configure Forced
IO Value
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

19

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Forced IO Behavior

Force IO functionality is enabled and some IO values are forced


When the PLC is restarted (Power Off and Power On)
Forced IO values do not get cleared
Restart of the PLC only performs Reset operation

To remove all the forced IO values, user need to perform Overall Reset

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

20

10

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Forced IO Behavior
Scenario 1:

Value of these two


addresses are forced

Forced Input is
enabled

Restart of PLC after executing reset function Force IO do not get


cleared
Forced IO values on field get cleared
Forced IO values in the software remain as it is

To reset both user need to execute the Overall Reset function

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

21

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Online Functions - Skip I/O Settings

Used to enable/disable I/O Slots during PLC operation


The PLC stops communicating with the Base or Slots that have been
selected for skipping.

Select to skip the


complete Base

Select to skip
particular slots in the
Base

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

22

11

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Online Functions - Fault Mask

Configured to run the program even though a module is in Fault


condition during the PLC Operation
Enables uninterrupted program execution, even in case of errors in the
module

Select to Fault
Mask the complete
Base
Select to Fault Mask
particular slots in the
Base

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

23

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Online Functions - Module Changing Wizard


Used to change a module when the PLC is in the RUN mode
Open the Module Changing Wizard in SoftMaster

Select the module


to be changed and
click Next

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

24

12

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Online Functions - Module Changing Wizard


Detailed information for the selected module is displayed

Review the Module


details. Select the
Module Name and
click Next.

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

25

Online Functions - Module Changing Wizard

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

In the Removing Module dialog box, click Next after removing the
module

Remove the Module


and click Next
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

26

13

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Online Functions - Module Changing Wizard

Insert the new module and click Next on the Installing New Module
dialog box
Once the installation of the new module is complete, click Finish to close
the wizard

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

27

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Online Functions - Base Changing Wizard

Used to change a faulty Base when the PLC is in the RUN mode
Changing a Base is similar to the Module change procedure

Details of the Base


are displayed

Select the Base to


be changed and
click Next.

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

28

14

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Online Functions - Online Editing


Start Online Editing

Used to edit a program when the PLC is in the RUN mode


From the menu bar in SoftMaster, click Project Open from PLC to open
the Project
Click Start Online Editing to start editing the program

Write Modified Program


Writes the changed program to the PLC

Stop Online Editing


Used to end the online editing session

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

29

Project open in
Online Editing
Mode

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

30

15

Describe Various Online Functionalities in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Describe Various Online Functionalities in


NM

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

31

Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

SoftMaster-NM is used to configure and monitor communication


modules
Online Functionalities:

Read I/O Information


Write Parameter
Read parameter
Delete parameter
Enable link
Upload/Download (File)
System Diagnostic
Reset

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

32

16

Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM


2/2/2012

Online Functions - Read I/O Information

Honeywell

Reads information of Communication Interface Modules and I/O


modules from the Base (ML200R PLC)
Select Online Read IO Information

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

33

Configure Communication Interface Modules

Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Double click on a Communication Interface Module to view and


configure its details
Detailed I/O module information cannot be viewed from SoftMaster-NM

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Details of
FEnet
module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

34

17

Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM


2/2/2012

Online Functions - Write Parameter and Read Parameter

Honeywell

Write parameter
Writes configuration of interface modules to the PLC

Read Parameter
Reads configuration of interface modules from the PLC
On complete, it populates the information in the Project Window of
SoftMaster-NM

Select the modules


to Write the
configuration to the
PLC
Select the modules
to Read the
configuration from
the PLC
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

35

Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM


2/2/2012

Online Functions - Delete Parameter and Enable link

Honeywell

Delete parameter
Deletes configuration information from the PLC and updates the SoftMasterNM Project Window

Enable Link
Enable P2P and High Speed links on successful download of the
configuration into the PLC

Select the interface


modules to Delete
the configuration
from the PLC

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Select the
links to be
Enabled

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

36

18

Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Online Functions - Download/Upload


Upgrades firmware of the
Communication Interface
Modules
Two types of upgrade files:
OS - Firmware information file
BBM - Boot version file

Select the BBM file and click the


BBMBoot button

Select the interface


modules to be
upgraded

Select the file


type

Reset PLC

Select the OS file and click the


Download button

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

37

Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM


2/2/2012

Online Functions - Reset PLC/Reset Individual Module

Honeywell

Reset PLC
On completion of a Write operation to the PLC, reset the PLC

Reset Individual module

When basic parameters of the modules are changed from the Standard
Settings tab, reset the individual modules

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

38

19

Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Online Functions - System Diagnostics

View information for the CPU, Communication Interface Modules, and


Network status of the PLC
Click the down arrow key inside the System Diagnostics window to view
information for other bases

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

39

Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM


2/2/2012

Online Functions - System Diagnostics of CPU and Base


Right click on the
module and select
CPU Module
Information

Honeywell
Right click on the
module and select
Module Information

General information
for the Base
General information for
the CPU Module
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

40

20

Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM


2/2/2012

Honeywell

System Diagnostics of FEnet Module

Right click on the FEnet module to view the System Diagnostic Menu

Displays the statistics of


packets received
through the media

Information about
the communication
media
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

41

Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM


2/2/2012

Online Functions - System Diagnostics of FEnet Module


Status by service

Honeywell

FEnet module can be configured with


Dedicated, P2P and HS Link Services

Status of the services can


be viewed from the Status
by Service window

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

42

21

Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM


2/2/2012

Online Functions - System Diagnostics of FEnet Module

Honeywell

Ping Test
To verify status of the communication
link between an FEnet I/F module and
other stations on the network

Status of the
communication
with a computer
Other stations
IP address

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

43

Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM


2/2/2012

Online Functions - System Diagnostics of FEnet Module

Honeywell

Auto Scan
Scans and displays the Link Interface
Status of the whole network
Shows all FEnet addresses except
your own

Scanned the
redundant
partner in the
system

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

44

22

Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM


2/2/2012

Online Functions - System Diagnostics of Snet Module

Honeywell

Right click on the Snet module to view the System Diagnostic Menu

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

45

Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM


2/2/2012

Online Functions - System Diagnostics of Snet Module

Honeywell

Frame Monitor

Used to check frames of


exchanged data between the Snet
I/F module and an external
communication device

Displays frames:
Transmit and
Receive

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

46

23

Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Online Functions - System Diagnostics of Snet Module


Loop Back Test

Used to check the normal


operation of the port without
connecting Snet to an external
I/F module

Select the channel


to be tested
Status of the
Loop Back Test

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

47

Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM


2/2/2012

Online Functions - System Diagnostics of Snet Module

Honeywell

Status By Service
Snet Module can be configured with
Dedicated Service and P2P Service

Status of the services can


be viewed in the Status
by service window

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

48

24

Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM


2/2/2012

Online Functions - System Diagnostics of Snet Module


Displays the number of times
Dedicated Service
communication occurred

Honeywell

Displays the number of


times errors occurred
during Dedicated Service
communication

Displays
Channel number

Displays P2P
downloaded
parameters

Displays P2P
Block numbers
Checks P2P Service
status every 1 sec

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

49

Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM


2/2/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

50

25

Describe Various Online Functionalities in NM


2/2/2012

Describe Various Monitoring Options in


SoftMaster

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

51

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

Monitoring Functions are functions which can be performed once the


SoftMaster is online with PLC and monitoring is ON
Following are the Monitoring Functions

Start/Stop monitoring
Pause/Resume monitoring
Pausing condition
Change current value
System monitoring
Address monitoring
Special Module monitoring
Trend Monitoring
PID monitoring
SOE Monitoring
Custom Events
Data Traces

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

52

26

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Monitoring Functions
Start/Stop Monitoring

Done through the Monitor tab on the menu or by using the buttons on the
toolbar

Pause/Resume Monitoring
Done through the Monitor tab on the menu or by using the buttons on the
toolbar

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

53

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Monitoring Functions Pausing Condition

Used to pause the monitoring when specified condition on the particular


address is met
Maximum 10 conditions can be configured as pausing conditions

Select the program in


which the variable
having pausing
condition exists

Finds the variable in the


program to use it for
pausing condition

Select the variable for


which pausing condition
is to be configured

Select the set value for


the condition
Set the condition
(=, >, <, >=, and
<=) to pause the
monitoring

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

54

27

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Monitoring Functions Change Current Value

Honeywell

Change Current Value

According to the type of


the variable, set value
options will vary

If the forced I/O is


configured for the
variable, then forced I/O
setting option is
available to set the value
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

55

Monitoring Functions System Monitoring

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Used to view the Slot information, assigned I/O information, and Module
status of PLC

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

56

28

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Monitoring Functions System Monitoring

Used to view the


different bases

Shows the list of


modules in all
the bases

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

57

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Monitoring Functions System Monitoring


System Synchronization

It reads base information, I/O assignment method and slot information, I/O
skip information, forced I/O information from PLC and updates it in system
monitoring

Start/Stop Monitoring is used to Start/Stop the system monitoring

Used to update the


module information

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

58

29

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Monitoring Functions System Monitoring

Honeywell

All I/O Modules


ON/OFF
Used to check the
value of all I/O
Modules
Changes all the
Module Outputs
to ON or OFF

Selected I/O
Modules ON/OFF
Used to check the
value of selected
I/O modules
Changes selected
Module Outputs to
ON or OFF
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

59

Monitoring Functions System Monitoring

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Special Module Monitoring


Used to monitor the special modules like Analog I/O, and High Speed counter
module

Module Info
Displays the information of the selected module

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

60

30

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Monitoring Functions System Monitoring

Honeywell

To view the module information


Select the module in the System Monitoring window
Select the PLC Module Info from the menu bar to view the information
about the selected module

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

61

Monitoring Functions Address Monitoring

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Address monitoring is used to


View data in all address areas of PLC
Write data to specific address areas of PLC

Address Monitoring option is enabled only when Softmaster is online


with PLC
Address Monitoring displays the latest values only when Monitoring is
ON

If Monitoring is OFF, address monitoring displays the previous data value

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

62

31

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Monitoring Functions Address Monitoring

Data format options: 1bit, 8


bit, 16 bit, 32 bit, 64bit
Display formats: Binary,
BCD, hexadecimal, unsigned
decimal, signed decimal,
real, string

Address areas in
PLC. It varies
depending upon
the CPU type

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

63

Monitoring Functions Address Monitoring

Honeywell

Save and Save As options

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Saves the data currently displayed in all


address areas
It is saved as a single file in a user specified
location
Saves file with extension .mem

Export Address to File

Used to export the data currently displayed


in selected address area
File extension is (address + M)
Example: .iqm, .iim

Open

Import Address from File

PLC Type Settings

Used to open the files with extension .mem

Used to import the data from address file


which was previously exported

Used to select the address areas by


selecting the PLC type
Can be done only when the PLC is
disconnected

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

64

32

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Monitoring Functions Address Monitoring


Edit Data Options

If monitoring is ON, then data can be changed using Change Current Value
dialog box
Double click on the cell to open the
Change Current Value dialog box
If monitoring is OFF, data can be directly
written in the cell

Fill Data Area Option


If the monitoring is ON, the option is disabled
If the monitoring is OFF, it fills all/selected addresses
with specified value
Data can be specified in required data format
and display format

Clear Data
Disabled if monitoring is ON
Delete all data values in selected address area
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

65

Monitoring Functions Address Monitoring

Write PLC

Read from PLC

Write Selected Area to PLC

Start/Stop Monitoring

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Enabled when monitoring is


stopped
Transfer the data saved in online computer to PLC
Exclusive Read areas of F
address area cannot be written
to PLC for some types of CPU
Enabled when monitoring is
stopped
Transfer the data saved in PLC
to online computer

Enabled when monitoring is


stopped
Used to write selected area to
PLC
Used to start/stop the address
monitoring

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

66

33

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Monitoring Functions Special Module Monitoring

Honeywell

Displays the list of special modules installed on PLC


Used to monitor special modules

Select the special


module to be
monitored and
click Monitor

Parameters can be
changed in Setting
Value column

Select Test to test the operation of special


module after changing the parameters
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

67

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Monitoring Functions Special Module Monitoring

Honeywell

Displays the
Max/Min and
current value of all
the channels

Click to select the


Channel
Parameters can be
changed in Setting
Value column

Select Test to test the


operation of special
module after changing
the parameters

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

68

34

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Monitoring Functions Trend Monitoring

Displays the trend for analog and digital values


Select Monitor Trend Monitoring from the menu bar to open the
Trend Monitoring window
Bit Graph Displays the
data in Bit Address

Trend Graph Displays


the data in Word Address
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

69

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Monitoring Functions Trend Monitoring


Trend Configuration
Select Monitor Trend Monitoring from the menu bar
Right click on trend display and select Trend Settings

Max sample to keep is the total


number of samples. Max
sample to display cannot be
greater than Max sample to
keep

It is the
frequency at
which the data
is read from
PLC
Enter the address or
variable to monitor in
bit graph

Trend Graph
Setting

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

70

35

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Monitoring Functions Trend Monitoring


Graph settings
Right click on graph and select graph settings

Shows XY grid when


selected

Displays samples
on X axis
Displays time on
X axis

Shows X axis data when


selected

Used to set
minimum/maximum
range of graph

Specify the position of bit


and trend graph index
Used to specify the
color settings for the
trend display

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

71

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Monitoring Functions Trend Monitoring


Trend Monitoring
Displays the current value
of bit address. Right click
and select View Bit Value
to open Bit value window

Displays the bit


address and
graph color

Displays the
word address
and graph color

Displays the current value of


word address. Right click and
select View Word Value to
open the Word Value window

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

72

36

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Monitoring Functions Trend Monitoring

Honeywell

Graph Color Settings


Graph View Option

Graph cannot be
viewed if
unchecked

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Used to set the


color of the
graph

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

73

Monitoring Functions Trend Monitoring

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Graph Window Setting

Displays
Bit graph
value

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

74

37

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Monitoring Functions Trend Monitoring

Honeywell

Show Cursor

Shows the data value at the


point on which the mouse is
positioned

Synchronize Scrolling

Used to synchronize trend


graph with bit graph in time
axis

Save Trend Data as Bitmap


Trend graph is saved in
windows bitmap

Save Trend Data as text

Data on the trend is saved in


text format

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

75

Monitoring Functions PID Monitoring

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

PID Monitoring supports 256 PID loops


Loops are divided in 8 groups with each group containing 32 loops

Select the
block and the
loop to be
used

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Set the
parameters of
the PID in
setting view and
observe the
result in
monitoring view

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

76

38

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Monitoring Functions SOE Monitoring

SOE Monitoring is a new feature for monitoring the newly introduced


Event Input Module (2MLF-SOEA)
Operation of SOE Monitor is independent of Soft Master
Major functions:

Read/Save Event History


Delete Event History
View Module Parameter Setting
Save Event History (.xls file)

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

77

Monitoring Functions Custom Events

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Custom Events are events generated by user defined conditions

These events are registered in PLC for monitoring and recording events
history

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

78

39

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Monitoring Functions Custom Events


Custom Event Configuration
Maximum 10 events can be configured
Enable custom event capture if
required

Double click to open event


settings window

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

79

Monitoring Functions Custom Events

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Event Settings
Select the program which
contains the variable to be
configured

Select the address of variable


and event condition
Select type and message for
event
Used to specify the
associated address to
monitor on the occurrence of
event. Max 16 associated
addresses can be specified

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

80

40

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Monitoring Functions Custom Events

When the event has occurred, it can be observed on Event History tab

Double click to
open details

Shows the value of variable


configured and the value of
associated address

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

81

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Monitoring Functions Data Trace

It is used to specify the trace condition and address to trace in the PLC
Reads data from PLC, which complies the specified condition
In SoftMaster, data read from PLC is displayed as a graph
It is similar to trend monitoring

Bit Graph

Data satisfying the


condition is displayed

Trend Graph

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

82

41

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Monitoring Functions Data Trace


Configuring Data Trace
Select Trace Trace Settings

Bit address:
Rising edge and Falling edge
conditions are available
Word address:
<, <=, ==, >, >= conditions are
available

Enable Data
Trace
Configure the
condition and specify
the address whose
data is to be checked

Max 16 bit addresses


and 8 word addresses
can be configured
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

83

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Monitoring Functions Data Trace


Sample Settings
Total samples > Samples after trigger
Used when samples are required before trigger condition
Total samples = Samples after trigger
Used when samples are required after trigger condition
Samples after trigger = 0
Used when samples after trigger are not required

Frequency at
which data has
to be collected

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

84

42

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Monitoring Functions Data Trace


Right click on trend and select Graph
Settings or select Graph Graph
Settings from the menu bar
Graph Settings
Show grid
Displays grid on the screen when
selected
Show trigger
Trigger position is shown on
graph
Bit graph legend and Word graph
legend
Specifies position of bit graph
index and word graph index
Color setup
Specifies the Bit graph/Word
graph color
Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

85

Honeywell

Monitoring Functions Data Trace

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Animation
Displays the trace data in
chronological order
The scroll speed of animation
can be set in animation
settings

Write Trace Setting


Writes the configured trace setting
to PLC

Read Trace Setting

Read Trace Data

Reads trace setting from PLC


Read trace data from PLC and
displays
on screen

Delete Trace Data


Deletes the trace data from PLC

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

86

43

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Monitoring Functions Data Trace


Go to Trigger Position
Moves the trigger to its generated
point of time

Trace data
Displays the trace data values

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

87

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

88

44

Describe Various Monitoring Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Describe Various Debugging Options in


SoftMaster

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

89

Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

Debugging is a function by which the user can trace the program as a step unit

Debugging a program has the following implications

In a Ladder logic, the rung is the step unit


Rung can be traced or evaluated by applying breakpoints in the debugger

Debugging function is available only for a non-redundant ML200 PLC configuration


ML200R Simulator supports debugging
The simulator allows debugging when a PLC is unavailable

Debugging function is available only with the PLC in online mode


Debug is not available if PLC operation is in Run mode
Debug function is available only when the program in SoftMaster and program in PLC
are identical
If an error occurs in the PLC, the debugging is stopped
User has to clear the error to run the debug operation

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

90

45

Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Debugging Activities

Debugging a program comprises of the following activities

Go
RUN the complete program under debugger control
Go to Cursor
RUN the program up to a cursor position in a selected step
Step Into
RUN a single step of a program
Step Out
Step out of the current single stepped function or sub-routine
For a non-subroutine block, the program will execute the next step
Step Over
RUN the program to next step
Ignore and do not execute the next subroutine block and run the program to
the next step
Set/Remove Breakpoints
Breakpoints evaluate a step
Breakpoints List
Lists the Breakpoints in the current Program
Setting Breakpoint condition
Program breakpoints can be set based on a variable value/scan condition.

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

91

Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Debug Function access


Debug operations are available on the Debug Toolbar

Debug menu lists all of the operations with their respective keyboard
shortcuts

Set Breakpoint
Conditions

Go or Run

List the
Breakpoints

Step Over

Set/Remove
Breakpoints

Step Into

Go to cursor
selected step

Step Out

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

92

46

Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Debug - Breakpoints
A breakpoint can be set as follows:

A set
breakpoint

Place the cursor on a Rung or


program branch
Select the
(Set Breakpoint)
button from the Debug Toolbar

Breakpoint can be removed as


follows:
Place the cursor on the breakpoint
Select the
(Set Breakpoint)
button from the Debug Toolbar

Program stops at the breakpoint


when the program is in the DEBUG
mode

Step Into / Step Out / Step Over is


used after the program is stopped

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

A breakpoint that has


stopped the program

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

93

Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Debug Step Into, Step Over and Step Out

Step Into function:

Useful when Breakpoint is engaged during debugging.


Enters the program into the next step.
If current step is an application CALL to Subroutine, it will Step Into the Subroutine.
Accessible through DebugStep Into menu.

Step Over function:


Useful when Breakpoint is engaged during debugging.
Enters the program into the next step.
If current step is an application CALL to Subroutine, it will Step Over the Subroutine
and enter the next step.
Accessible through Debug Step Over menu.

Step Out function:


Useful when Breakpoint is engaged during debugging.
Used to exit a subroutine which has been entered into using Step Into.
Accessible through Debug Step Out menu.

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

94

47

Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Debug Go to cursor

The Go to cursor function is used to


stop a program at a cursor selected
location
The Go to cursor does not use
breakpoints

Program
stopped at
cursor
location

A Go to cursor can be set as follows:


Place the cursor on a Rung or
program branch
Select the
(Go to cursor) button
from the Debug Toolbar

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

95

Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Debug Breakpoint Conditions

A Breakpoint condition is a conditional debug statement in the program


The Breakpoint condition can be a Variable Breakpoint or Scan
Breakpoint
Variable Breakpoint can be used in all the data types supported by ML200

Invoke Variable
selection dialog box

Enable Variable
breakpoints

Variable and
program name
selection
Value of the variable
which enforces a
program break

Variable
information

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

96

48

Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Debug Variable Break


The variable is selected from the existing Local Variables list
Condition

Breaks the program after read or write operation from the address

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

97

Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Debug Scan Breakpoint

Scan Breakpoint function applies the breakpoint to program after the


specified number of scan count

For a scan count of 6, the debugger allows the user to change the value of
variable 6 times
After the count of 6, the program is stopped

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

98

49

Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Debug Breakpoints List

Breakpoints List shows a list of breakpoints being used in the program


Accessible through Debug Breakpoint List

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

99

Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Debug - Precautions
Basic Parameter option - Output during debugging

When selected, the program sends the data to the output module in
debugging mode

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

100

50

Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Debug - Precautions
A Redundant ML200R CPU will not support debugging
Only a non-redundant ML200 CPU will support debugging

Maximum 62 Breakpoints can be set in the PLC


PLC Operation switch should be in REM mode
The PLC should be online
The PLC should not be in RUN mode

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

101

Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Online Functions in SoftMaster and SoftMaster-NM

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

102

51

Describe Various Debugging Options in SoftMaster


2/2/2012

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Describe Software Required for Experion


Integration

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Software Required for Experion Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

MasterLogic Dedicated Protocol (MLDP) is used to integrate the ML200R PLC


with Experion PKS

Experion integration gains special access to elaborate areas of the


MasterLogic PLC through MLDP
Direct Variables
%R file Register Variables
CPU, I/O Module, Communication Status and Alarm Flags
Real Time Clock (RTC) Area
I/O Configuration Parameters
PLC History Logs
DISOE Module Integration

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Software Required for Experion Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Integration Requirements

Integration solution

Hardware/software required for MasterLogic PLC - Experion integration

Integrate MasterLogic PLC with Experion


Integration of MasterLogic with Experion PKS R311 and R400 is available as a project
special option
Integration of MasterLogic with Experion HS and LS is available as a standard product
Enable Experion to read/write data to MasterLogic PLC
Monitor PLC alarms and events on Experion Stations
Achieved by connecting the PLC to an Experion server through Ethernet and mapping PLC
data items to standard Experion points

MasterLogic PLC
MasterLogic Server 1.2.0.1
Can be used with EPKS R311 and R400
For HS/LS ML Server software is integrated with the product
Experion PKS Server
Experion R311 or R400

Tools required for MasterLogic PLC - Experion integration

SoftMaster
Quick Builder
Experion Station

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Experion Integration

Describe Software Required for Experion Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Integration Architecture

Experion Server
MasterLogic
Server
Configuration
Tool

ML200R PLC
Experion Integration

MasterLogic
Server

Quick Builder (ML PLC


Channel/Controller)

ML200R PLC
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

ML200R PLC
Describe Software Required for Experion Integration
2/2/2012

Honeywell

Integration Elements
SoftMaster is used for:
Monitoring the PLC status and data values
Monitoring and forcing the I/O addresses
Creating and monitoring programs as a part of plant control

Quick Builder is used for:


Configuring MasterLogic Channels, MasterLogic Controllers, Analog and
Status points
Uploading/downloading Channels, Controllers and Points from/to the
Experion Server

Experion Station is used for:


Monitoring the online status of ML200R PLC integrated with Experion
Changing the online status of MasterLogic controllers and MasterLogic
channels
Viewing point values obtained from Experion on custom graphics
Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Software Required for Experion Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Integration Elements (Continued)


MasterLogic PLC

Replaces necessary sequential relay circuits for machine control


Used in any application that needs some type of electrical control
Executes the program and changes the output state based on varying input
conditions

MasterLogic Server

Starts communication with PLCs


Reads PLC information and writes to the Experion server
Writes values from the Experion server to PLCs
Transfers system status, IO module information, alarms/events and SOE of
PLCs associated to an Experion Server

Experion Server

MasterLogic Server is loaded on the Experion Server to communicate with


MasterLogic PLCs
Contains tools like Quick Builder and Experion Station

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Software Required for Experion Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Installation Prerequisites
Prerequisites for installation of MasterLogic Server:
Experion Server with an OPC Client license must be present
MS-XML version 6 must be installed
Administrator access to Experion Server

If MasterLogic Server is installed on a node which is not an Experion


Server / Client, then an error occurs and installation is aborted

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Software Required for Experion Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Install MasterLogic Server

To install MasterLogic Server, run the setup.exe file from the ML


Server installation CD and follow the prompts
Refer to the MasterLogic-Experion PKS Integration User's Guide on the
CD for more details

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Software Required for Experion Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

MasterLogic Files Copied

When ML Server installation is complete, the following files are copied:


ML200R PLC graphics and .xml files are copied to
C:\ProgramData\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Client\Abstract
ML200R PLC .xml, .exe, .dll files are copied to C:\ Program Files\
Honeywell\ MasterLogicServer

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Software Required for Experion Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

MasterLogic Files Copied To Abstract Folder


Files copied to the Abstract folder

XML files

Graphics Page
(.htm), xml
and xsd files

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Describe Software Required for Experion Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

MasterLogic Files Copied


Files copied to the MasterLogicServer folder

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

11

Install MasterLogic Server on Client Machine

Describe Software Required for Experion Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Installation of MasterLogic Server in Experion Client machines installs


only Quick Builder components
MasterLogic component is added to the component manager
Allows configuration of MasterLogic Channel, Controller, and Points in Quick
builder from client machines

Quick Builder
components created as
a part of installation

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

Describe Software Required for Experion Integration


2/2/2012

Difference between ML Server on Experion


PKS and LS

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Experion Integration

13

Difference between ML Server on Experion PKS and LS


2/2/2012

Honeywell

MasterLogic Server for Experion

Differences between the ML Server for Experion PKS and Experion


HS/LS
ML Server
Experion PKS

Item
License
Operating System
(on which ML Server
is installed)

ML Server
Experion HS/LS

Separate license is
required

Available as standard product.


Separate license is not
required

Windows 2008 Server /


Windows 7

Windows 7

Error message which


occurs when ML
Server is executed on
unsupported OS

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

14

Difference between ML Server on Experion PKS and LS


2/2/2012

Describe ML Server Software Licensing with


EXP PKS

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

15

Describe ML Server Software Licensing with EXP PKS


2/2/2012

Honeywell

License Features
MasterLogic Server license features include:

Number of PLCs
With demo version Maximum number of MLPLC supported per
MasterLogic server is 10
If the license supports 10 PLCs, then the ML server communicates with
a maximum of 10 PLCs
Number of PLC points that can be used across all PLCs
Maximum number of points supported per MasterLogic server is 8050
If the license supports 1000 PLC points then a maximum of 1000 PLC
points can be used for data communication across all PLCs

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

16

Describe ML Server Software Licensing with EXP PKS


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Obtain a License
Obtaining a new license via e-mail

Ensure that the Voucher ID provided by Honeywell is present


Create Host ID files by opening the ML Server License Registration
Application
Send an e-mail to: License.Server@honeywell.com with following details
On the subject line, type the voucher ID as: VOUCHID:<voucher ID>
Attach the Host ID files: < Computer name>.zip and <computer
name>.HID files

The subject line is case


sensitive. Other than the subject
line and attachments, do not
include any other information.

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

17

Describe ML Server Software Licensing with EXP PKS


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Install License
The license is sent from Honeywell in a zip file
Unzip the file using the password password

Click Start All Programs Honeywell MasterLogic Server License


Registration
Open the .cert license file received from Honeywell
Browse to select the license
certificate received from Honeywell

Select the .cert file


and click Open

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

18

Describe ML Server Software Licensing with EXP PKS


2/2/2012

Honeywell

License Update

After installing the license certificate on an Experion Server, the


features, including the number of points, are updated.
An updated license can be re-installed using the following steps:
Click Start > All Programs > Honeywell MasterLogic Server > License
Registration
Click Supersede License
Enter the password
Enter the updated certificate and respond to the Re-License ML server
dialog box

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

19

Describe ML Server Software Licensing with EXP PKS


2/2/2012

Honeywell

License Transfer

To transfer a license certificate from one Experion Server to another


Experion Server:
Terminate the license certificate on the first Experion Server
Install the license certificate on the new Experion Server
A .term file is generated after terminating the license and is used to transfer
the license to a different machine

To transfer the license to the other server, follow the installation steps in
the MasterLogic-Experion PKS Integration User's Guide on the CD

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

20

10

Describe ML Server Software Licensing with EXP PKS


2/2/2012

Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP


Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Experion Integration

21

Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

MasterLogic Server configuration is required to communicate with


MasterLogic PLC
Tools used for MasterLogic Server Configuration
ML Server Configuration Tool
Quick Builder
Experion Server
MasterLogic Server
Configuration tool

Quick Builder (ML PLC


Channel/Controller)

ML200R PLC

..

ML200R PLC

ML200R PLC

MasterLogic
Server

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

22

11

Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

ML Server Configuration
By default, the PLC ML01
appears in the window
and the first PLC is
selected

Alarms and Events raised


by the ML Server will be
associated with this asset

Determines the
speed in seconds
after which
Dynamic MLConfig
XML Parameters
are updated

Enter scan periods


for different
parameters in
seconds

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

23

Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Add/ Delete PLC


ML200R PLCs must be added in ML Server Configuration tool
Each ML200R PLC can be configured separately
ML200R PLCs can also be deleted from this tool

Right-click on the PLC


and select Delete PLC

Right-click on ML Server
and select Add PLC

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

24

12

Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

PLC Tab

General Parameters
PLC Name: Unique name for
each PLC
PLC Type: PLC type such as
ML200R, ML200-IEC, ML200NonIEC
EPKS Asset Name: Asset against
which ML Server will raise status
alarms and events
IP Address 1 and 2: used by the
primary and secondary PLC
Server on the Primary Network
IP Address 3 and 4: used by the
primary and secondary PLC
Server in case of dual network
ML Server searches
for a valid PLC
connection in the
following sequence:
IPAddress1, 2, 3 ,4

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

25

Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

PLC Configuration
RTC

Enable Read/Write allow ML Server to Read/Write RTC time from/to PLC


Sync Interval time after which RTC time is read from PLC and updated in
Experion
Deadband PLC time is updated with Experion system time, if the time
difference is equal to or greater than RTC Deadband

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

26

13

Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Logs Tab
PLC Logs

Select Events checkbox to transfer PLC events to Experion as


Alarms/Events
Event Category selection indicates if the event needs to be transferred as an
Alarm or Event to Experion
Event Category types
System Alarm
System Event
SOE

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

27

Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Advanced Tab
ML Server Advanced
settings
Configured Bases
Select the bases which
are present in the
system
Reduces the load on
MLServer since the
system points are
created only for
selected bases
It is an optional setting
By default, system
points are created for
all 31 bases
Select Save Configuration
on completion

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

28

14

Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration


2/2/2012

Configure Quick Builder Component Manager

Honeywell

Open Quick Builder


Select Tools Component Manager
Enable MasterLogic under devices items

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

29

Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Configure MasterLogic Channel

MasterLogic Channel forms the interface between one or more


MasterLogic Controllers and ML Servers
Configure only one MasterLogic channel in Quick Builder for all ML PLCs
defined in ML Server Configuration tool

Ensure that the Host Name


(Preferred Data Source)
contains localhost

Select the Background


Scan Period
Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

30

15

Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Configure MasterLogic Controller

Configure MasterLogic controller in Quick Builder for ML PLCs defined


in ML Server Configuration tool
If more than 700 PLC points need to be configured for a single ML PLC,
more than one ML controller can be configured in Quick Builder for the same
ML PLC
Ensure that within one ML
controller, all the points
must be configured for
the same ML PLC

Select the MasterLogic


Channel

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

31

Upload System Point in Quick Builder

Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Click the Upload button in Quick Builder, to upload the ML PLC points
that are built using PointBuild Utility during ML server configuration

ML Server
downloaded from
the ML Server
Configuration tool

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

32

16

Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Configure Analog and Status Points

Analog and Status Points are configured for exchanging data between
MasterLogic Server and Experion

For Analog Point, enter the location


as ML01.%MW10$CON#WORD
For Status Point, enter Location
as ML01.%MW10$CON#BIT

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Experion Integration

33

Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Address MasterLogic Points in Quick Builder

Address in Quick Builder points to a memory location in ML200R PLC


PLC ID
ItemName of associated ML PLC
Two digit number ranging from 01 from 99 and always prefixed by ML
Device Address
Memory Address location within ML PLC to retrieve data

ML01.%MW10$CON#WORD
Memory area supported in ML200R

ML01: PLC ID
%MW10: Device Address

K memory area is supported


starting Experion R310

Support PID functions


Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

34

17

Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Address MasterLogic Points in Quick Builder


Command Type:

Different commands are used to Read/Write data From/To ML200R PLC by


ML Server
$CON: Continuous Read/Write command
$DEV: Device Area Read/Write command

ML01.%MW10$CON#WORD
CON: Command Type
Data Type in ML PLC Memory Address

Experion Integration

WORD: PLC Data Type

Corresponding Data type to be used by ML Server

BIT

BYTE

WORD and INT

DWORD, DINT and REAL

WORD and INT

LWORD, LINT and LREAL


Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

35

Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Addressing for DISOE Points

Only DEV command type and BIT data type must be used for reading
DISOE points
Base number, Slot number, and Channel number must not be prefixed
with 0
SOE must be added for
reading the SOE points

ML01.U1.2.6$DEV#BIT@SOE
Syntax: <Base number>.<Slot
Number>.<Channel Number>
Base Number and Slot Number where
the DISOE module is connected and
Channel Number of the Point which
has to be read

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

36

18

Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration


2/2/2012

Enable MasterLogic Channel and Controller

Honeywell

Verify that the


MasterLogic Channel
is enabled and status
is OK

Verify that the MasterLogic


Controller is enabled and
status is OK

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

37

Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

MasterLogic Points in Station

MasterLogic Analog
Point Detail display

MasterLogic Status
Point Detail display

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

38

19

Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

DISOE Events in Station

PLC name configured


in ML Server
Experion Integration

Point name configured in


Quick Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

39

Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Experion Integration

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

40

20

Describe ML Server Configuration for EXP Integration


2/2/2012

Topic: Experion Integration


Contents
Install ML Server Software on Experion ................................................................................................3
Get an ML Server License for Experion PKS ......................................................................................15
Install ML Server License on Experion PKS ........................................................................................19
Configure ML Server for Experion Integration .....................................................................................25

Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder ................................................................................33

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Experion Integration
Install ML Server Software on Experion

Install ML Server Software on Experion


Practice
Objective
The objective of this lab is to install Master Logic (ML) Server software on the Experion Server.
Prerequisites
Ensure that you have installed Experion Server with an OPC client license

Ensure that you have installed MS XML Version 6

Ensure that you have logged into the Experion server machine with Administrative
privileges

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Experion Integration
Install ML Server Software on Experion

Procedures

Step

Action

Installation of ML Server
1

Right-Click on the setup application that is present in the ML Server Installation CD or


Directory and select Run as Administrator.
Select Allow on the User Account Control Window.

ATTENTION
Ask Instructor for File Location.
If an earlier version if the ML Server is already
installed; the wizard displays an error message
indicating that the previous ML Server version must
be removed before installing a new version.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Experion Integration
Install ML Server Software on Experion

Step
2

Action
On the Welcome to the Installation Wizard dialog box, click Next.

ATTENTION
If Experion server software is not found on the machine
where the ML Server is being installed, the following
message is displayed EPKS Server is not found in this
system. Installation is Aborting.
In response to this message dialog box, click OK and in the
InstallShield Wizard Completed dialog box click Finish.

To continue with the ML Server installation, install EPKS


server with an OPC Client license and then start reinstalling ML Server from the beginning.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Experion Integration
Install ML Server Software on Experion

Step
3

Action
In the License Agreement, select I accept the terms in the license agreement and
click Next.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Experion Integration
Install ML Server Software on Experion

Step
4

Action
In the Destination Folder dialog box, click on the Change button to change the
destination folder location if needed.

TIP
Honeywell recommends retaining the default
destination folder for installing the ML Server.

Click Next.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Experion Integration
Install ML Server Software on Experion

Step
6

Action
In the Ready to Install the Program dialog box, click Install.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Experion Integration
Install ML Server Software on Experion

Step

The InstallShield Wizard installs the MasterLogic Server software.

Action

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Experion Integration
Install ML Server Software on Experion

Step
8

10

Action
In response to the InstallShield Wizard Completed dialog box, click Finish.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Experion Integration
Install ML Server Software on Experion

Step

Action

Verify Installation for ML Server


9

Verify that the graphic pages and .xml files shown below are present in the Abstract
Server. C:\Program Data\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Client\Abstract.
Type

Filename

xml files

Graphic Pages

MLConfig.xml

This file contains PLC Specific


Configuration.

MLMonitor.xml

This file contains common settings for


the ML Server and Graphics.

MLSOEConfig.xml

This file contains SOE Configuration for


all PLCs.

MLPLC_Config.htm

This Experion Graphic Page displays


the Base Slot Information of PLC.

MLPLC_Driver.htm

This Experion Graphic Page displays


ML Server (Driver) diagnostics
information.

MLConfig.xsd

XML Schema file for MLConfig.xml

MLMonitor.xsd

XML Schema file for MLMonitor.xml

MLSOEConfig.xsd

XML Schema file for MLSOEConfig.xml

Schema files

Description

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

11

Experion Integration
Install ML Server Software on Experion

Step
10

Action
Verify that the .xml, .exe, .dll files shown below are present in the MasterLogicServer.
C:\Program Files\Honeywell\MasterLogicServer.
An example of the MasterLogicServer is shown in the screen capture below.
Type

Filename

Description

xml file

MLAPPSettings.xml

This file is used for configuring the


MasterLogic Server application
settings.

Schema file

MLAPPSettings.xsd

XML Schema file is used for


MLAPPSettings.xml

12

Document

MLServer_User_Guide.pdf

This user guide describes how to


integrate Master Logic PLC with
EPKS.

Template

StatusPointBuildTemplate.txt

This is a template file for point


building.

Configuratio
n Tool

MLServerConfigTool.exe

This utility is used for configuring


PLC information, SOE and other
information for the ML Server.

Point Build
Utility

PointBuiltUtility.exe

This utility is used for building the


points corresponding to PLC and
the parameters associated with the
point.

License
Application

MLServerLicenseRegistration.
exe

This application is used for


obtaining a new license, update,
terminate and to transfer the
license.

Demo
certificate

MLPLC_Demo.cert

This is a Demo Certificate file for


ML Server for 100 PLC Points.

QDB file

ML_Sample.qdb

This file contains sample ML


Channel, ML Controller and sample
ML Analog/Status Points.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Experion Integration
Install ML Server Software on Experion

Step
11

Action
This is what the MasterLogicServer mentioned in Step 10 above looks like.

TIP
The ML Server Configuration Tool, License Registration, Users
Guide and the License Application are accessed through Start
All Programs Honeywell MasterLogic Server.

Shortcut for the Configuration Tool is available on the desktop.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

13

Experion Integration
Install ML Server Software on Experion

This page was intentionally left blank.

14

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Experion Integration
Get an ML Server License for Experion PKS

Get an ML Server License for Experion PKS


Practice
Objective

This lab is for Reference Only.

The objective of this lab is to explain the procedure to obtain a license for the ML Server
after installation.

Prerequisites
ML Server is installed on the Experion Server.

Users should have the Voucher ID - This is provided by Honeywell when you purchase the
ML Server.

Host ID Files These files are automatically created when the ML Server License
Registration Application is launched for the first time.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

15

Experion Integration
Get an ML Server License for Experion PKS

Procedures

Step

Action

Obtaining a License for ML Server Reference Only


1
ATTENTION
This lab is for Reference Only.
2

Ensure that the Voucher ID is present. This is provided by Honeywell when purchasing
the ML Server.

Create the Host ID files by opening the MLServerLicenseRegistration.exe with


administrator privileges (ML Server license registration application) from C:\Program
Files\Honeywell\ MasterLogicServer.

ATTENTION
The name of the Host ID files will be in the following
format:
<Computer Name>.zip and <Computer Name>.HID
Example: If the computer name is EPKSSRVPC1 then
the Host ID files created are EPKSSRVPC1.zip and
EPKSSRVPC1.HID.
These files are located in C:\ ProgramFiles\
Honeywell\ MasterLogicServer.
4

Send an e-mail with the subject line:


Example:

16

VOUCHID:<voucher ID>

VOUCHID:MLPLC_1PLC_50Points

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Experion Integration
Get an ML Server License for Experion PKS

Step
5

Action
Attach the Host ID files:
Example:

<Computer Name>.zip and <Computer Name>.HID

E00ESVXX.zip and E00ESVXX.HID

ATTENTION
The subject line is case sensitive.
Other than the subject, do not type any additional
information in the e-mail.

License.Server@honeywell.com

Send the e-mail along with the attachments to:

After receiving the e-mail, Honeywell will send the new license certificate in a zip file.
This file must be unzipped using the password password.

Save the license certificate in the ML Server system.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

17

Experion Integration
Get an ML Server License for Experion PKS

This page was intentionally left blank.

18

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Experion Integration
Install ML Server License on Experion PKS

Install ML Server License on Experion PKS


Practice
Objective
This lab is for Reference Only.
The objective of this lab is to install the ML200R license on an Experion Server.
Prerequisites
ML Server is installed on Experion Server.

The license is obtained from Honeywell using the procedure mentioned in the Describe
Master Logic Programming lesson.

The license certificate file is copied to C:\Program files \ Honeywell \


MasterLogicServer.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

19

Experion Integration
Install ML Server License on Experion PKS

Procedures

Step

Action

Installing a license for ML Server.


1
ATTENTION
This lab is for Reference only. Do not perform this lab
in class. In class, we will be using Demo License.

20

Right click on License Registration option present in StartProgramsHoneywell


MasterLogic Server and select Run as Administrator.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Experion Integration
Install ML Server License on Experion PKS

Step

In the ML Server License Registration dialog box, click Browse to locate the license
certificate file.

Action

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

21

Experion Integration
Install ML Server License on Experion PKS

Step
4

Action
Select the certificate file from C:\Program files\Honeywell\MasterLogicServer and
click Open.

ATTENTION
Contact your instructor if the certificate file is not in the
path shown above.

22

In the ML Server License Registration dialog box, click OK.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Experion Integration
Install ML Server License on Experion PKS

Step
6

Action
Select Cancel in the ML Server License dialog box.

ATTENTION
The ML Server License dialog box displays the
Licensed number of PLCs and the Licensed Number
of PLC points. These numbers will vary based on the
license.

If the license is not terminated, then it is installed


automatically when the ML server software is reinstalled on the same machine.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

23

Experion Integration
Install ML Server License on Experion PKS

This page was intentionally left blank.

24

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Experion Integration
Configure ML Server for Experion Integration

Configure ML Server for Experion Integration


Objective
The objective of this lab is to demonstrate and familiarize the user with configuration of the ML
server using its Configuration Tool
Prerequisites
ML Server installed on Experion server with a license certificate
Introduction
In this lab you will perform the following:

PLC information for ML Server will be configured using the ML Server Configuration Tool

Simulate the ladder logic using Soft Master simulator

PLC information such as PLC Name, ID, Type, IP Address, Logs and SOE are configured for each
PLC in the plant. This information is used to build system points using Point Build Utility.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

25

Experion Integration
Configure ML Server for Experion Integration

Partition Sheet
Item

Value to be Entered

MLPLC IP Address
MLPLC IP Address

26

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Experion Integration
Configure ML Server for Experion Integration

Detailed Instructions

Step

Action

Configuration of ML Server using Configuration Tool.


1

Click on Start All Programs Honeywell MasterLogic Server Configuration


Tool.

Default information of ML01 PLC will appear in the ML Server Configuration dialog box
as shown below.
Enter EPKS Asset Name as ML1 (This Asset must be created in Enterprise Model
Builder and loaded on Experion Server having ML Server installed)

Click on ML01.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

27

Experion Integration
Configure ML Server for Experion Integration

Step
3

28

Action
Now we will configure the PLC settings, under PLC field in the ML Server Configuration
window.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Experion Integration
Configure ML Server for Experion Integration

Step

Action

From the PLC tab of the ML Server Configuration window, complete the General section
as shown:
PLC Name: MLPLC1
PLC Type: ML200R
EPKS Asset Name: ML1

ATTENTION
The PLC Name is a unique name for each PLC. It is
alphanumeric, and there is no limit on the number of
characters used.

Enter the IP Addresses for MLPLC. The ML Server searches for a valid PLC connection
in the following sequence: IP Address 1, 2, 3, 4.

TIP

Refer to the partition sheet at the start of lab for your IP


addresses.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

29

Experion Integration
Configure ML Server for Experion Integration

Step
6

Action
Check Enable Read/Write in the RTC section. Also, enter the following data:

Synch Interval: 5

Deadband: 10

TIP
To update RTC time in Experion graphic displays, Enable Read/Write
to RTC and EPKS Write must be checked.
If Synch Interval is 0, then RTC time is not read or written from/to the
PLC.
If the Deadband value is 0 then RTC time is not written to the PLC.
7

From the ML Server Configuration window, under PLC Events field. Select the
Events checkboxes for Error, System, Mode, and Shutdown.

TIP
Keep all other settings in PLC Logs at the default values.

30

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Experion Integration
Configure ML Server for Experion Integration

Step

Action

8
In ConfiguredBases(Optional) field, select B1 and B2 (one at a time) and press
button.

Close the ML Sever Configuration window.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

31

Experion Integration
Configure ML Server for Experion Integration

Step
10

Action
In response to the ML Server Configuration save dialog box, click on Yes.

TIP
On selecting Yes button, the PointBuildUtility launches
and creates the system points automatically.
11

32

Click OK when the configuration has been successfully saved. Ignore the Restart
MLServer message.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Experion Integration
Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder

Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder


Practice
Objective
The objective of this lab is to configure the MasterLogic interface in Quick Builder.
Prerequisites

The OPC Client license should be on the EPKS Server.

ML Server is installed on the Experion server along with the license certificate.

MLDP must be configured on the Experion server.

ML1 asset is configured and loaded on the EPKS server.

Introduction
In this lab you will perform the following:
Add the MasterLogic component in Quick Builder.

Create, configure and download an ML Channel.

Create, configure and download an ML Controller.

Create, configure and download an Analog and Status point.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

33

Experion Integration
Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder

Procedures

34

Step

Action

Launch Configuration Studio and open Quick Builder.

To add a MasterLogic Channel in Quick Builder, first select Tools Component


Manager

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Experion Integration
Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder

Step

In the Modify Project dialog box, select MasterLogic.

Action

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

35

Experion Integration
Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder

36

Step

Action

Scroll up and select Analog Point and Status Point if not already selected.

Click OK.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Experion Integration
Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder
Step

Action

In the Modify Project dialog box click OK.

To add the MasterLogic Channel, select Edit Add Items.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

37

Experion Integration
Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder

38

Step

Action

In the Add Item(s) dialog box, select MasterLogic Channel.

Click OK.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Experion Integration
Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder

Step

Accept the default values for the channel.

10

Action

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

39

Experion Integration
Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder

40

Step

Action

11

Select Tools Download.

12

In the download dialog box, select Selected items only and click OK.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Experion Integration
Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder
Step

Action

13

Click OK in the Results window.

14

To add a MasterLogic Controller, select Edit Add Items.

15

In the Add Item(s) dialog box, select MasterLogic Controller and click OK.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

41

Experion Integration
Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder

Step
16

Action
In the MasterLogic Controller configuration window select the following:
Channel Name: CHAMAS1
Background Scan: Enabled

42

17

Repeat steps 11 to 13 for downloading the ML Controller.

18

To add a MasterLogic Analog Point, select Edit Add Items.

19

From the Add Item(s) dialog box, select Analog Point.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Experion Integration
Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder

Step
20

Action
In the MasterLogic Point configuration window, enter the following:
Parent Asset: ML1
PV Scan Period : 1

In the MasterLogic Point configuration window, click on the browse


the PV Source Address.

button to select

21

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

43

Experion Integration
Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder

Step
22

Action
In the Address Builder window, select the following:
Address Type: Controller
Controller: CONMAS1
Enter the Location: ML01.%WW10$CON#WORD and click OK.

23

Go to the Control tab.

24

On the Control tab define the Source Address and Dest Address for the Setpoint (SP)
and Output (OP) by selecting the browse button

25

In the Address Builder dialog box, select the controller CONMAS1 (for both Setpoint and
Output) and enter the following locations:
Setpoint (SP) Source Address : ML01.%WW11$CON#WORD
Dest Address
Output (OP)Source Address
Dest Address

26

44

: ML01.%WW11$CON#WORD
: ML01.%WW12$CON#WORD
: ML01.%WW12$CON#WORD

Set the Scan Period = 1 sec.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Experion Integration
Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder

Step
27

Action
On the Alarm tab, configure two alarms using following settings:

Alarm Type: PVHigh


Priority: High
Limit: 90

Alarm Type: PVLow


Priority: High
Limit: 20

28

Repeat steps 11 to 13 to download the Analog point.

29

To add a MasterLogic Status Point, select Edit Add Items.

30

From the Add Item(s) dialog box select Status Point.

31

In the Main tab, enter the following:


Parent Asset: ML1
PV Scan Period : 1
On State Descriptors:
Enter State 1 ON and State 0 OFF

32
33

Select the browse

button to select the PV Source Address.

In the Address Builder dialog box, select the following:


Address Type: Controller
Controller: CONMAS1
Enter the Location: ML01.%MX10$CON#BIT and click OK.

34

Go to the Control tab.

35

On the Control tab, define the Source and Dest Addresses for the Output (OP) by
selecting the browse button

36

In the Address Builder dialog box, select controller CONMAS1 and enter the Location
as shown below:
Output (OP)Source Address
Dest Address

: ML01.%MX12$CON#BIT
: ML01.%MX12$CON#BIT

2/2/2012

37

Set the Scan Period = 1 sec.

38

Go to the Alarm Tab. On the Alarm Tab, select On Alarm (State 1 Alarm) and set the
Priority as High.

39

Repeat steps 11 to 13 to download the Status point.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Click OK.

45

Experion Integration
Configure MasterLogic Interface in QuickBuilder

46

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Describe MasterLogic System Display in


Station

Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe MasterLogic System Display in Station


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

Experion System Status displays and Custom displays are used for monitoring
the PLC status

Standard Station Displays


Channel Summary Page
Point Detail Display

Custom Displays
PLC System Status display
MLPLC_Config.htm
MLPLC_Driver.htm

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe MasterLogic System Display in Station


2/2/2012

10

Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station

Honeywell

Custom Display

Information of the
ML PLC like PLC
ID, PLC type, base
and last RTC
Based-time
Indicates information
about the Controller IP
Address. Shows Rack
Configuration

CPU information and


Miscellaneous Flags
Status, CPU Error
Status is shown

Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe MasterLogic System Display in Station


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Base

Base is the back plane of PLC on which the power supply, communication, and
other modules are installed

Base on the configuration page indicates 3 different base numbers


Base 0 (Master)
Base 0 (Stby)
Base 1

Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe MasterLogic System Display in Station


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Driver Info

Driver Info Tab shows the Diagnostic


Parameter Information of the ML Server,
status of communication between ML
Server, PLC, and Experion

Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe MasterLogic System Display in Station


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Analog Point Detail Display

Displays the location


in PLC where the
values are stored

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe MasterLogic System Display in Station


2/2/2012

10

Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station

Honeywell

Status Point Detail Display

Displays the location


in PLC where the
values are stored

Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe MasterLogic System Display in Station


2/2/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe MasterLogic System Display in Station


2/2/2012

Topic: Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station


Contents
Monitor Communication Status of ML Server Interface.........................................................................3

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

10

Monitor MasterLogic Status using Experion Station ..............................................................................7

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station


Monitor Communication Status of ML Server Interface

Monitor Communication Status of ML Server Interface


Practice
Objective
The objective of this LAB is to demonstrate the communication of the MLDP interfaces in the
Experion PKS server.

ML Server is configured on the Experion server.

An ML Channel and ML Controller are built and downloaded to the Experion PKS server.

ML FEnet Card must be set to MLDP server on Standard Settings

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

10

Prerequisites

Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station


Monitor Communication Status of ML Server Interface

Procedures

Step

Action

Click on Start All Programs Honeywell Experion PKS Server Station.

In Station, select View System Status Channels.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station


Monitor Communication Status of ML Server Interface

Step
3

Action
On the Channel Status Summary page, select the Enable checkbox for CHAMAS1 to
enable the ML Channel.

ATTENTION
For Enabling/Disabling hardware, your access level
should be equal to or greater than SUPV.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

10

To connect Server to PLC, FEnet Protocol settings


should be set to MLDP Server

Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station


Monitor Communication Status of ML Server Interface

Step
4

Action
Click on CHAMAS1 to open the Channel Status page.
Monitor the communication using the Error Statistics and the Barometer.

Repeat steps 2 to 4 for enabling the ML Controller and monitoring the communication
status.
ATTENTION
In Step 2, select Controllers.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station


Monitor MasterLogic Status using Experion Station

Monitor MasterLogic Status using Experion Station


Practice
Objective
The objective of this LAB is to monitor the MasterLogic Status in Experion PKS station.

ML Server is configured on the Experion server.

An ML Channel, ML Controller and ML Points (Analog/Status) are built and downloaded in


the Experion PKS server.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

10

Prerequisites

Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station


Monitor MasterLogic Status using Experion Station

Procedures

Step

Action

Click on Start All Programs Honeywell Experion PKS Server Station.

In the Command Zone, type MLPLC_Config and press Enter.

ATTENTION
Installation of ML Server creates the following graphic pages:
MLPLC_Config, MLPLC_Status and MLPLC_Driver.

On the MLPLC_Config page observe the Configuration Information of the system.

To view the Configuration Information of each base, select Base 0 (Master) in the Base
drop-down box.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station


Monitor MasterLogic Status using Experion Station

Step

Action

Monitor the Configuration Information of 2MLR-CPUH and 2MLL-EFMT on Base 0


(Master).

Repeat steps 4 and 5 for Base 0 (Stby) and Base1.

On the MLPLC_Config page, go to the Driver Info tab.

Monitor the Driver Info page of MLPLC.

In the Command Zone, type poista1 and press F12 (Detail).

10

On the detail display page of poista1, click on the Scanning tab.

11

Note the Source and Destination addresses:__________________________________


_____________________________________________________________________

12

Change the values of the Source Address using Monitor Address Monitoring in
SoftMaster.
Use the following values:
%MX10 : 1

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

10

%MX12 : 1

Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station


Monitor MasterLogic Status using Experion Station

Step
13

10

Action
Monitor the PV and OP status and High Priority Alarm.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station


Monitor MasterLogic Status using Experion Station

Step

Action

14

Change the OP value from the Point Detail display in station. Using Monitor Address
Monitoring check whether the value has been written to the specified destination
address in SoftMaster.
%MX12 (Address)

: 0 (Value)

15

For your Analog point, type poiana1 in the Command Zone and press F12 (Detail).

16

On detail display page of poiana1, click on the Scanning tab.

17

Note the Source and Destination Addresses for SP,PV, and OP:__________________
_____________________________________________________________________

18

Change the values of the Source Address using Monitor Address Monitoring in
SoftMaster.
Use following values:
%WW10: 44
%WW11: 66

2/2/2012

19

Monitor the SP, PV and OP status in station.

20

Change the SP to 55 and change the OP to 70 from the Point Detail display. Using
Monitor Address Monitoring check whether the value has been written to the
specified destination address in SoftMaster.
%WW11 (Address)

: 55 (Value)

%WW12 (Address)

: 70 (Value)

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

11

10

%WW12: 95

Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station


Monitor MasterLogic Status using Experion Station

This page was intentionally left blank.

12

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

11

Describe the LM to ML Migration

LM-ML Migration Support

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

ML PLC provides all functionalities available in the Logic Manager


ML PLC has advanced technical features

Following are some of the reasons for migrating to Master Logic (ML)
from existing Logic Manager (LM)

Latest technology
Higher program memory (10MB)
Higher flash memory (16MB)
Higher transmission speed (100 Mbps)
Higher IO handling capacity (23,808 rack IO)
Supports combination of Ladder and Function Blocks (IEC61131-3
compliant)
Windows-based programming software
PLC History (Error, Mode, Shutdown, System) available
Status LEDs available on CPU and IO modules

LM-ML Migration Support

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Benefits of Migration to ML PLC

Zero footprint solution preserves existing field wiring with minimal or no


disruption
Easy migration of LM database using Migration Tool
Conserves the engineering convention/practices of the plant
Seamless replacement
Shutdown time for LM migration is 48 hours or less
Provides long-term support and future upgrades

LM-ML Migration Support

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Honeywell

Migration Prerequisites

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

Standard Conventions
Control System specification
EB files
PRN files
IO Database
UCN details
Peer connection list and peer-to peer-design concepts
SI array flags and numerics
HPM load calculation

LM-ML Migration Support

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

11
Honeywell

LM Migration Solutions Based on User Scenarios


SCENARIO #1

LM used as PLC
Need Peer to Peer with UCN nodes

Migration Solution

Replace LM using MLPLC via HPM-Serial Interface


Keep the field wiring intact using wiring kits
Identify the wiring kits required by the wiring kit calculator tool

Readiness Check

Existing HPM has slot for serial interface card


Current load/configuration check using HPM readiness tool

SCENARIO #2

LM used as PLC
Or any IPC620 PLC standalone or connected to Hiway Interface Module (HIM)
Do not need Peer to Peer with UCN Nodes

Migration Solution

Replace LM using MLPLC via EPLCG


Keep the field wiring intact using wiring kits
Identify the wiring kits required by the wiring kit calculator tool

Readiness Check

Customer already has EPLCG or can afford to buy new


Redundancy needed?

SCENARIO #3

LM used as Safety System

Migration Solution

Replace LM using FSC

Readiness Check

Check what percent of safety signals in LM


Split signals? Take Safety signal to FSC and rest to Master Logic PLC

LM-ML Migration Support

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

LM Migration Solution: HPM-SI (Serial Interface)


ML Controller connected to HPM via Serial Interface

Serial Interface
Existing LM System

LM-ML Migration Support

LM Migrated System

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

LM Migration Solution: Path 2 EPLCG


ML Controller is connected via EPLC Gateway

LM Migrated System

Existing LM System

LM-ML Migration Support

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

LM Migration Solution: Path 3 FSC


If the LM is responsible for handling Safety signals:
Safety signals will be transferred to the Fail Safe Controller (FSC)
Other process logic will be controlled by the ML PLC

LM Migrated System

Existing LM System

LM-ML Migration Support

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

11
Honeywell

Migration Items
Change Point references

HMI

HMI

Recompile displays
LCN

LCN

NIM

NIM
UCN

FSC

FSC
UCN

Change Point references

HPM

HPM
PMIO

PMIO

Recompile CL Programs

LM

LM points to HPM-SI points

LCS IO

SI
Card

LM
LCS IO

Wiring Kits

LM

Changes LM Ladder to ML Ladder


LCS IO

LM
LCS IO

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

LM-ML Migration Support

Master Logic

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Wiring Manager

Wiring kit introduced as part of LM-ML Migration provides a costeffective solution


Interfaced with Field Cable Termination Kit
Enables seamless migration of LM to ML without disturbing field wiring
Field Cables

Custom Cables

ML
Processor
and Power

ML I/O Rack

Device 1

Edge connector
on Wiring Kit
Field Connector Termination PCB

Field Cable

Device 2

Wiring
Kit

Device 12
Finger PCB
LM-ML Migration Support

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Benefits of Wiring Kit Solution


Field wiring remains intact while migrating

Wiring kit considers LCS I/O variations and maps them to ML I/O
resulting in an optimum signal match solution
Common solution for Direct-wired and Remote Terminal Panel types
Additional panel space is not required
Installation of ML PLC in different panels other than the existing LM is
supported

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

LM-ML Migration Support

11

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Wiring Kit Operating Models


WORKING MODE

Wiring kit

ML replaces LM in same space

Wiring kit
SERVICE MODE

Guide Rail
Custom Cables
Kit to ML

Master Logic PLC

Logic Manager
(LM) Chassis

Master Logic PLC & IO

LM-ML Migration Support

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

11
Honeywell

Custom Cable

Logic Manager
Wiring Kit

ML PLC I/O
Connections

Connects to finger
PCB in the wiring kit

LM-ML Migration Support

Connects to ML PLC
I/O Slot

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

13

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Requirements of Wiring Kit


Safety requirements of Wire Manager:

PCB circuitry should retain channel-to-channel isolation


Complies with NEC code for safety
Finger PCBs should be removable for maintenance
Allows easy accessibility of field connectors and terminal blocks of the ML
PLC IO
Cable termination should be on the respective terminal blocks using proper
lugs and ferrules

Performance requirements of Wire Manager:


Wiring kit should ensure compatibility of signals to corresponding ML IOs
Wiring kit PCBs acts as termination board and enables signal connectivity
wherever there is direct one-to-one compatibility of signals
Wiring kit may include an active card with signal conditioning circuitry where
the signals levels / logic are incompatible
Wiring kit should retain isolation as in existing LM channel-to-channel and
input-to-output

LM-ML Migration Support

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

14

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Automated Conversion Processes and Tools


Automated Conversion tool is used for:

Conversion of LM points and ladder programs to ML PLC/ HPM SI points

LM Configuration
Definition and Mapping

LM to MLPLC IO
MAP Report

LM-ML Migration Support

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

15

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Migration Guideline
Migrate LM Processor
Replace LM processor with ML PLC

Migrate LM I/O rack


Remove LM I/O (local) rack
Replace ML PLC (local) I/O rack

Regroup LM I/O channels


Regrouping for UAIM
Migrate LM database

LM-ML Migration Support

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

16

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

11
Honeywell

Migrate LM Processor
Remove LM I/O Module

Remove the I/O communication wiring between LM I/O module and the LM
Processor module

Replace LM Processor
Unscrew the mounting screws and remove the LM processor
On the panel, mount the ML PLC mounting plate in place of the removed LM
processor
Mount the ML PLC processor on the ML PLC mounting plate
Connect the power supply for the ML PLC processor

LM-ML Migration Support

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

17

Honeywell

Migrate LM I/O Rack

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

Remove LM I/O (local) rack


Identify field cables to be removed
Verify cable tags and ferrules to ensure
that they match with wiring diagrams
Remove swing arm connectors of the field
cables
Safely unscrew the mounting screws
Remove LM I/O rack

LM-ML Migration Support

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

18

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Migrate LM I/O Rack

Replace with ML PLC I/O (Local) rack

Mount wiring kit in place of the LM I/O rack using mounting screws

LM-ML Migration Support

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

19

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Migrate LM I/O rack


Identify finger PCBs to be inserted (in the Wiring kit)

Active Boards

Passive Boards

Note: Selection of Active or Passive boards depends on type of LM


I/O module. Detailed Information will be published.

LM-ML Migration Support

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

20

10

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

11
Honeywell

Migrate LM I/O Rack


Identify custom cables to be connected to finger PCBs
Insert the custom cable through the bottom of the Wiring Kit

Note: Selection of a custom cable depends on using an Active or


Passive board.

LM-ML Migration Support

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

21

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Migrate LM I/O Rack

Connect the longer wire to the upper end of the finger PCB and connect
the shorter wire to the lower end of the finger PCB
Insert finger PCBs in the corresponding slot of the Wiring Kit

LM-ML Migration Support

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

22

11

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Migrate LM I/O Rack

Connect the swing arm connectors (hanging from the field wiring) to the
corresponding finger PCBs on the Wiring Kit

LM-ML Migration Support

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

23

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Migrate LM I/O Rack

Connect the ML PLC connectors of the custom cables to the


corresponding I/O modules of the mounted ML PLC I/O rack
Connect the power supply for the Wiring Kit based on the electrical
requirements
Install SoftMaster in the identified computer

LM-ML Migration Support

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

24

12

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

11
Honeywell

Regroup

Regroup LM I/O channels

Identify custom cables that must be used for regrouping the LM I/O
channels
Connect one end of the custom cable to the finger PCBs in the Wiring kit
Connect the other end of the custom cables to the adjacent identified ML
PLC I/O modules

Regrouping for UAIM

Identify the I/O type of the UAIM being used in the existing LM. (For
example, the UAIM can be an RTD or Thermocouple etc.)
Regroup based on signal type and the available spare slots in the ML PLC
I/O rack
With references to the cable tags and the ferrules, terminate them in the
appropriate ML PLC I/O rack

LM-ML Migration Support

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

25

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Migrate LM Database

Migrate LM Ladder Logic to the equivalent ML PLC Ladder Logic

DI, DO, AI, AO Flag, numeric points are migrated to equivalent HPM
SI array points

Digital composite points are migrated to the equivalent Ladder Logic


in the ML PLC and HPM SI Array Point

Logic points are migrated to the equivalent Ladder Logic in the ML


PLC

LM-ML Migration Support

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

26

13

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Post Migration Check

All LM processors are replaced with respective ML PLC processors


All LM I/Os are connected to corresponding finger PCBs on the Wiring
Kit
All finger PCBs on the Wiring Kit are connected to the corresponding
ML PLC I/O modules
All cabling is intact and there are no freely hanging cables
Perform basic power supply tests and loop checks
Perform software migration check

LM-ML Migration Support

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

27

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Post Migration Check


Check for changed displays

Rebuild all points in other nodes (xPMs/AM) accessing the LM points


Idle the HPM and change the HPM SI scan, if required
Check for redundancy requirement of the migrated modules

LM-ML Migration Support

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

28

14

Describe the LM to ML Migration


2/2/2012

12

Describe Controller Diagnostics

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Controller Diagnostics


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

Firmware of MasterLogic System must be upgraded only by Honeywell


support personnel
The MasterLogic controller can be diagnosed based on the LED status
and visual indicators available on the modules
In this lesson, we will learn about the status LED and visual indicators
for the:
CPU
Power supply
Extension Modules

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Controller Diagnostics


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Power Supply Diagnostics

S. No
1
2

Name

Description

Power LED

LED indicator for 5VDC power

24VDC / Run terminal

Indicates RUN state of system


OFF when CPU error occurs
OFF when CPU mode is changed to STOP mode

FG terminal

Frame ground terminal

LG terminal

Line ground terminal

Power input terminal

Used to connect the power supply

Terminal cover

Cover for protection of terminal


Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell

CPU Diagnostics
S. No
1

Name
Operation
Mode Switch
RUN / REM /
STOP

Description
Operation mode of CPU module is configured by key switch
RUN Mode: Program Running
STOP Mode: Program Stop
REM Mode: Operation mode can be set by programming tool

2-a

RUN / STOP
LED

Operation status of CPU module


Green: 'RUN' mode
Red: 'Stop' mode

2-b

WAR LED

ON (Yellow): Warning / Off: Normal


Note: Warning LED is used to indicate multiple status like System
hardware status, and FORCE IO condition

2-c

ERR LED

ON (Red): Critical Error / Off: Normal

2-d

Operation LED

4 Digit Display of Operation Status (Refer to ML200R error code)

2-e

Redundant
Status

RING ON: Green (Ring topology is established)


RING OFF: Ring is not established
RING Blink: Once Ring -> Disabled
RED ON: Redundancy LED (Redundant operation mode)
RED OFF: Single operation
MASTER ON: CPU is operating as Master
MASTER OFF: CPU is operating as Standby
CPU-A, CPU-B: CPU classification

2-f

Extension
Network Status

Communication Status with Extension Base


ACT ON (YELLOW): Channel is in operation
LNK ON (GREEN): Channel link is enabled

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Describe Controller Diagnostics


4/25/2012

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Controller Diagnostics


4/25/2012

S. No

Name

Description

Sync. connector

Interface connector between CPUs

4-a

Connector for
extension network

Connector used for extending the base


2 Connectors are provided for establishing
ring topology
Connectors can be of Fiber Optic or
twisted pair type

4-b

5-a

Boot/Normal Switch

Used for OS Download


ON (right): Normal mode
Off (left): Prohibited (Off may cause damage
to module)

5-b

A/B Side
for CPU

Switch to define CPU classification


CPU Module is A if the switch is in Left side
CPU Module is B if the switch is in Right side

5-c

Reset/D. Clear switch

Switch set from center to left Reset CPU


Switch set from center to left for more than 3
sec Overall Reset CPU
Switch set from center to right Clear CPU

USB Connector

USB Connector (USB 1.1)

RS-232C Connector

RS-232C Connector

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell

Extension Modules Status LEDs


LED Name

LED Status

Network or Module Status

TX/RX

ON

Channel is in operation

LINK

ON

Channel link is enabled

ON

Ring topology is established

Flashing

Ring topology is disabled

RING

RELAY

CHK
FAULT

RUN

I/F

OFF

Network disconnected

ON

Neighboring module is connected and


data is being relayed

OFF

No Neighboring module is connected

ON

ML200R CPU in Warning state

Flashing

Duplicated station number found

ON

Duplicated

Flashing

Frame error

ON

ML200R CPU in RUN Mode

Flashing

Waiting status for CPU


acknowledgement

OFF

ML200R CPU in Stop Mode

Flashing

Normal connection status

OFF

Connection is not established

PADT

ON

SoftMaster / SoftMaster-NM connection

ERR

ON

ML200R CPU in Error Status

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Describe Controller Diagnostics


4/25/2012

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Controller Diagnostics


4/25/2012

12

Honeywell

CPU Diagnostics (continued)

Honeywell

Extension Drive diagnostics

S. No

Name

Description

Module Status LED

Status LED

Base Number Switch

Switch to configure
Extension Base
x10: 10 digit, x1: 1
digit Max. 31-base setting

USB Connector

Connector for SoftMaster


(USB 1.1)

Expansion Network
Connector

Connector for Expansion


Base
2 Connectors are present
3 types: F.O - F.O,
Twisted Pair Twisted
Pair, F.O Twisted pair

RESET switch for


Expansion driver
module

Reset the module when


pushed
Base needs to be skipped
before the module is reset.
If the base is not skipped
before the reset,
disconnection error occurs

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Describe Controller Diagnostics


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Controller Error codes

ML200R CPU Error codes

Error codes are displayed on the 4-digit operational status display


Some example Error codes

Error
code

Cause

Corrective Action
(Solution)

Operation
status

LED status

Diagnostic
timing

502

Low battery
voltage

Replace a battery with the


power on

BAT: On

Always

101

CPU position error

CPU is installed at wrong


position. Position the CPU
correctly.

STOP

S101

Turn it on

103

Base abnormal error

Configure expansion cable as


ring topology and position the
detached base correctly. For
information of detached base,
refer to CPU error log.

STOP, RUN

E103

Execute program

Refer to the MasterLogic 200R CPU Users Manual for more information on
error contents, diagnosis and corrective actions

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Controller Diagnostics


4/25/2012

Consider Side A is running as Master and Side B is running as


Standby
Power supply of both CPU is failed and the CPU which was in Standby
mode is powered on first
In this case, powered on CPU stays in the standby mode and waits for
other (primary) CPU to turn on
To cause the standby to start as primary once it's in standby waiting for the
primary, turn switch to stop and back to run. It now runs as primary and
master light is lit.

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Controller Diagnostics


4/25/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Describe Controller Diagnostics


4/25/2012

12

Honeywell

Redundancy Behavior of ML PLC

Describe IO Diagnostics

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

11

Describe IO Diagnostics
4/25/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

In this lesson, we will learn about the status LEDs and visual indicators
for the:

AI Module
AO Module
High Speed Counter
ThermoCouple (TC) Input Module

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

Describe IO Diagnostics
4/25/2012

LED
Name

LED
Status

Normal
Operation

ON

RUN
LED

ALM
LED

Description

Flashing
every 0.2
sec

Module hardware
error

Flashing
every 1 sec

Module software
error

OFF

Module off

OFF

Operation normal

Flashing

Data Processing
alarm
or Change rate
alarm

2MLF-AD4S

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

13

Diagnostics of AO Modules (2MLF- DV4A, DC4A)


RUN LED
status

Describe IO Diagnostics
4/25/2012

Honeywell

Description

ON

Normal Operation

Flashing

Parameter Settings error or


Digital Input Conversion
values error

OFF

Module off

2MLF-DV4A
MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

14

2MLF-DC4A
Describe IO Diagnostics
4/25/2012

12

Honeywell

Diagnostics of AI Module (2MLF - AD4S)

Diagnostics of AO Modules (2MLF- DV4S, DC4S)


LED
Name

LED
Status

ALM
LED

Description
Normal Operation

ON
RUN
LED

Honeywell

Flashing
every 0.2
sec

Module hardware
error

OFF

Module off

OFF

Operation normal

Flashing

Data Processing
alarm
or Change rate
alarm

2MLF-DV4S2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Describe IO Diagnostics
4/25/2012

15

Diagnostics of High Speed Counters (2MLF-HO2A/HD2A)


LED Name

MLF-DC4S

Honeywell

Description

A-phase pulse input

B-phase pulse input

External preset input

External gate input

OUT0

OUT0 compared output

OUT1

OUT1 compared output

READY

Ready signal

2MLF-HO2A/HD2A
MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

16

Describe IO Diagnostics
4/25/2012

LED
Name

RUN
LED

ALM
LED

LED Status

Honeywell

Description

ON

Normal Operation

Flashing
every 0.2 sec

Module hardware
error

OFF

Module off

OFF

Operation normal

Flashing
every 1 sec

Sensor Disconnect
Alarm

2MLF-TC4S

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

17

Describe IO Diagnostics
4/25/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

18

Describe IO Diagnostics
4/25/2012

12

Diagnostics of TC Input Module (2MLF-TC 4S)

Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

19

Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

Troubleshooting Interface Modules can be performed using the following


diagnostics:
Symptoms and Management by LEDs
Diagnosis of Communication Module through SoftMaster-NM
Communication Module Information
Ping Test
Frame Monitor
Loop Back Test
Network Autoscan
System LOG

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

20

10

Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules


4/25/2012

Diagnostic Functions with SoftMaster-NM


Select Online System Diagnosis option in the menu bar of NM
Right click on the FEnet module to view the Diagnostic Functions

Displays the general information


(speed, version, etc.) about the
module

Diagnostic
Functions

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

21

Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Status by Service

Status by Service - Displays the status of Dedicated Communication,


P2P, HS Link Service
Basic Module
information
Diagnostic
information
Driver type
information
High-speed Link
Service information

P2P Service information


MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

22

11

Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules


4/25/2012

12

Honeywell

Troubleshooting FEnet

Honeywell

Ping Test
Ping Test
Target details for
Ping Test

Ping Test
Results

Basic Module
information

Detailed
information

Start test
Ping Test status

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

23

Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Troubleshooting FEnet
Autoscan

Provides IP information for all modules specified on the present network

Module, Link and


Media status

Basic Module
information

FEnet Architecture
Read
Continuous or
Refresh current
data

Auto scan status

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

24

12

Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules


4/25/2012

LED Indications
LED

Error

Action

RUN
(Normally ON)

Turned OFF
after FEnet
module is
powered ON

Ethernet communication module incorrectly installed


Check DC 5V power supply of power module
Check if the communication module is correctly installed on the base
Check if communication module is correctly perceived with SoftMasterNM

I/F
(Normally ON)

LED ON or OFF
during normal
communication

Check the operation state of CPU module


Check if the communication module is correctly installed on the base
Check if module information is correctly perceived with SoftMaster
software

P2P
(Normally ON
if using)

Turned off
during P2P
command
service

Check if the basic parameter is downloaded correctly


Check if the function block/command is edited correctly
Check if the media is connected correctly
Check if Link Enable is enabled

HS
(Normally ON
if using)

Turned of
during HS link
service

Check if the basic parameter is downloaded correctly


Check if HS link setting is correct
Check if Link Enable is enabled

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

25

Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Troubleshooting FEnet
LED Indications (continued)
LED

Error

Action

PADT

Turned OFF during remote


connection service

Check if IP address for remote (PADT) connection is normal


Check if remote connection of PADT is disconnected

PC

Turned OFF during dedicated


service

Check if IP address for dedicated connection is correct


Check if Host table is enabled
If Host table is enabled, check if the IP address of HMI (PC) is
registered in the host table
Check if connection is requested from MMI (PC) device

ERR

Turned ON during normal


communication

Check if the basic parameter is downloaded correctly


Check for any error in interface with CPU

TX

Turned ON during transmitting


data

Check if request frame is received normally from the client

RX

Turned ON during receiving


data

Check for any error in receiving program


Check for any error in frame edits
Check if the media is connected correctly

PHY

Turned OFF during normal


communication

Check if the media is composed of 100Mbps (Auto-Negotiation)

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

26

13

Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules


4/25/2012

12

Honeywell

Troubleshooting FEnet

Honeywell

Error Codes
Module checking through error codes
Error
code

Error display

Description

E00-01

ECM_12 ECM_15

H/W self-diagnosis error

E00-02

ECM_13, ECM_18

Interfacing error with CPU

E02-01

ECM_18

Interface abnormal between FEnet I/F module and CPU

E03-01

HS link parameter setting error

After online link is enabled, HS link parameters specified


incorrectly, or not specified.

E03-02

HS link not executable

After link enabled with HS link parameters, normal


communication is not available as desired.

E03-03

_HSxRLNK and _HSxTRX contacts


not ON when HS link executed

After link is enabled with HS link parameters, _HSxRLNK


is not ON.

E03-04

_HSxLTBL contact ON when HS


link executed

After link enabled with HS links _HSxRLNK ON,


_HSxLTBL is ON due to PLC or communication error.

E04-01

[No response] message displayed


when remote connection requested

RS-232C cable not connected or PLC is OFF.

E04-02

[Other error message] displayed


when remote connection requested

Service not executed normally due to unsuitable request

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

27

Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Troubleshooting Pnet
System Diagnosis by SoftMaster-NM

Detailed Module information


Shows the basic information about the Communication Module
HS link
Displays the Flag information of a High-speed Link
Autoscan
Displays the Slaves connected to the Pnet master

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

28

14

Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules


4/25/2012

Detailed Module Information

Basic Module
Information

Module
Firmware and
Hardware
Information

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

29

Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules


4/25/2012

Honeywell

AutoScan
Autoscan

Displays the Slave modules connected to the Pnet interface module


Basic Module
information

Master
information

Module and Link


status

Profibus Network
Architecture

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

30

15

Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules


4/25/2012

12

Honeywell

Troubleshooting Pnet

Honeywell

LED Indications in Pnet


LED Indications
LED Label
RUN

I/F

HS

P-RUN

STATUS

ERR

Indications

Actions

ON

Flashing

OFF

Flashing

ON

OFF

High speed link disabled

ON

Flashing

ON

ON

ON

ON

Abnormal connection
status of a part slave

Check
connection /
setting of slave

ON

Flashing

Flashing

Flashing

ON

OFF

Change setting of SYCON


when high speed link is
enabled

ON

Flashing

Flashing

Flashing

OFF

ON

Abnormal connection of all


slaves

Check
connection /
setting of slave

OFF

OFF

OFF

Serious fault occurred

Contact
customer
service center

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

31

Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Troubleshooting Snet
Diagnostic Functions with SoftMaster-NM
Select Online System Diagnosis option in the menu bar of NM
Right click on the Snet module to view the Diagnostic Functions

Module
information

Diagnostic
Functions

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

32

16

Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules


4/25/2012

Frame Monitor
Monitors the data frames transmitted and received through Snet
communication channels

Basic
Information of
the module
Data format to
be displayed in
Frame Monitor

Channel selection

Pause monitoring
activity

Details of
frame data

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

33

Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Frame Monitor
Result of the
frame

Frame Type
Frame Data
Time stamp of frame

Length of Frame
monitored

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

34

17

Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules


4/25/2012

12

Honeywell

Frame Monitor

Honeywell

Loop Back Test

Loop Back Test is used to check the


operation of the communication port
in the Snet module

Link connections
Module
information

It is performed without connecting the


Snet module to an external device

Channel
selection

Steps for Loop Back Test


Download the basic parameters into
the module
Disable the P2P link
On the hardware channel:
Disconnect channel connection
For RS-232C: link pin-2 and pin-3
For RS422/485 link TX+ with RX+
and TX- with RX Select the Channel in the Diagnostic
Tool
Select Start

Loop Back Test


results

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

35

Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules


4/25/2012

Honeywell

Status by Service
Status by Service
Dedicated Service
information
Basic Module
information
Read
Continuous or
Refresh
current data

Driver type
information

P2P Service
information
Basic Module
information

P2P downloaded
parameter and driver
type information
MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

36

18

Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules


4/25/2012

LED Indications
LED Name
RUN

I/F

TX

RX

ERR

LED Descriptions
Snet operation status

LED status

LED status descriptions

ON

Normal operating

OFF

Abnormal operating of Snet I/F Module

ON

Interface error with CPU module

OFF

Communication module initialization

Flashing

Normal operating

During frame
transmission

ON

During frame transmission

OFF

Frame transmission completed

During frame receiving

ON

During frame receiving

OFF

Frame receiving completed

ON

Frame Error

OFF

Normal frame

Interface status with


CPU

Frame error

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

37

Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules


4/25/2012

Honeywell

System Logs
System Logs are accessed from SoftMaster
Select Online PLC History from the menu bar

Logs of the
Standby [S]
PLC

Error, Mode
Change, System
and Shutdown Logs

Displays information
in the selected log

Updates the currently


opened log

Displays details of
the selected error
and a remedy to
correct it

Deletes PLC History

MasterLogic TroubleShooting

Reads all LOGS


from the PLC
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

38

19

Saves PLC History


to a .csv file

Describe Diagnostics on Interface Modules


4/25/2012

12

Honeywell

LED Indications

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

13

Describe the ML200R SMART IO Modules

Reference

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the ML200R SMART IO Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Smart I/O: Definition


Smart I/O is an Open-type remote I/O module

It is connected with a field network for real-time controlling of the I/O


modules distributed in a field

This module may not be available in your region. Consult the Honeywell
Representative to check the availability of this module

Reference

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the ML200R SMART IO Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Smart I/O: Key Features


Key Features
Compact

Compact design supporting DIN Rail

Flexible

Supporting four field networks


(Profibus-DP / DeviceNet / Modbus)
Having various I/O modules (16/32
points, DC/Relay/TR type)
Available to systematize other devices
in various ways

Easy

Setting parameters easily using dedicated


configurator (Sycon) or SoftMaster200/100R without additional programming

Reference

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Smart I/O Dimensions: D I/Os

Describe the ML200R SMART IO Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

A (Length)

B (Width)

C (Depth) *

16-point I/O

115mm

50mm

39mm

32-point I/O

176mm

50mm

39mm

* Removable type (C, C1): 47.5mm

16-point Module

32-point Module

Reference

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the ML200R SMART IO Modules


2/2/2012

Smart I/O: Protocol Support


Item

Profibus-DP

DeviceNet

Modbus

Protocol

Profibus-DP
(RS-485/EN50170)

DeviceNet
(CAN)

Modbus
(RS-422/485)

Transmission speed

9.6kbps~12Mbps

125/250/500kbps

2.4kbps~38.4kbps

Transmission
Distance

100m~1.2km

500/250/125m
(Thincable:100m)

500m

Topology

BUS

Trunk & Drop

BUS

Transmission
Method

Token pass &


Master/Slave (Poll)

CSMA/NBA (Poll
Cyclic,COS,Strobe)

Master/Slave
(Poll)

Max. number of
stations

32 sta./segment
(sta. #: 1~99)

64 stations

32 stations

Link Capacity

1K/master:PUEA
7K/master:PUEB

2,048pt./Master

64pt./station

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Reference

Describe the ML200R SMART IO Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Smart I/O: Physical Details - Profibus DP D I/Os


Designation

Details

9-PIN Plug

Label of Smart I/O

Display the Part name of the Smart I/O

Communication LEDs

Display the status of the communication module (Rx,Tx & Pwr)

Address Switch

For setting the Station Address ( X16 and X1)

LED Channel Status

For displaying the channel status (ON/OFF)

Hook

For Mounting the Module

Terminal Block

For connection of the field I/Os and Power Supply

Reference

Connector for connecting with the communication module

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe the ML200R SMART IO Modules


2/2/2012

13

Honeywell

Honeywell

Smart I/O: Physical Details (Profibus Analog Module)


Designation

Details

9-PIN Plug

Connector for connecting with the communication module

Label of Smart I/O

Display the Part name of the Smart I/O

Communication LEDs

Display the status of the communication module (Rx,Tx & Pwr)

Address Switch

For setting the Station Address ( X16 and X1)

Hook

For Mounting the Module

Terminal Block

For connection of field I/Os and Power Supply

5
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Reference

Describe the ML200R SMART IO Modules


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Smart I/O: Comparison Analog I/Os-Profibus DP


Analog Input

Analog Output

MPL-AV8C

MPL-AC8C

MPL-DV4C

MPL-DC4C

Voltage

Current

Voltage

Current

Type
Protocol

Profibus-DP

Channels

Analog
Range

10V

0~10
V

0~5V
1~5V

20mA

0~20mA,
4~20mA

10V

0~10
V

0~5V
1~5V

Digital
Range

-8000
~
8000

0
~
8000

0
~
4000

-8000
~
8000

0
~
8000

-8000
~
8000

0
~
8000

0
~
4000

Resolution

16Bit

4~20mA,
0~20mA
0
~
8000

16Bit

Accuracy
Ambient

0.3%

0.3%

0.3

0.3

Operation

0.3%

0.4%

0.3%

0.4%

Max. Input

Voltage: 15V

Current: 30

Insulation
Reference

Non-insulation between channel


Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Non-insulation between channel


Describe the ML200R SMART IO Modules
2/2/2012

13

Describe Basics of Ladder Programming

Reference

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Basics of Ladder Programming


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Introduction

Ladder diagram is used for schematic representation of control wiring


diagram
Most commonly used programming language in a PLC
Represents a program in graphical diagram
Resembles a ladder with the two vertical power rails and horizontal rungs
Rung

(Phase/+) Power supply rail (Neutral/-)

Reference

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

10

Describe Basics of Ladder Programming


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Ladder Diagram For Lamp Control

Ladder diagram to control the Lamp using a switch is shown below

24VDC

Lamp 1

Switch 1

L1

L2

In a ladder diagram, the output is always present at the extreme right


corner
Neutral/Negative of Output is connected to ground (explained in next slide)

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Reference

11

Describe Basics of Ladder Programming


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Ladder Diagram For Lamp Control

If the lamp is connected to the left side, accidental ground will produce a
False output
Accidental ground in the below case will cause the lamp to glow even if the
switch is open
24VDC

L1

Switch 1

Lamp 1

L2

If the lamp is connected to the right side, accidental ground cannot


produce a False output
Accidental ground in the below case will cause the fuse to blow off if the
switch is in close position
24VDC

L1

Reference

Lamp 1

Switch 1

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

12

L2

Describe Basics of Ladder Programming


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Normally open contact

Normally closed contact

Positive transition-sensing contact

Negative transition-sensing contact

Coil

Negated coil

Set coil

Reset coil

Positive transition-sensing coil

Negative transition-sensing coil

Reference

13

Coils and Contacts

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Describe Basics of Ladder Programming


2/2/2012

13

Honeywell

Logic Gates using Ladder Diagram

Ladder Diagram for OR gate


Lamp L1 will energized if either A or B is ON

Ladder Diagram for AND gate


Lamp L1 will energized if both A and B are ON

Reference

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

14

Output

Output

Describe Basics of Ladder Programming


2/2/2012

Sample Logic For Bi-Directional Motor Control

Honeywell

Basic ladder to run a motor in Forward or Reverse direction have a


Forward Pushbutton (FPB) and a Reverse Pushbutton (RPB)

MF and MR are latches provided for Forward and Reverse Push button

Latch

Drawback of the circuit

No provision to prevent a second command when the motor is running in


other direction

Reference

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

15

Describe Basics of Ladder Programming


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Sample Logic Motor Control

Ladder diagram shown below prevents a second command when motor


is running in one direction

Prevents Forward
command if motor running
in reverse direction

Prevents Reverse
command if motor running
in Forward direction

Drawback of the circuit

No provision to stop the motor

Reference

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

16

Describe Basics of Ladder Programming


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Motor Control Stop Command


Ladder diagram shown below includes a Stop command

13

Normally closed contact is used for stop pushbutton

Contact opens when


the Stop Pushbutton is
pressed

Drawback of the circuit


No provision to trip the motor in case of overload

Reference

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

17

Describe Basics of Ladder Programming


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Motor Control Overload Protection


Ladder diagram shown below includes a Overload signal
Prevents motor from running in case of overload

Trips the motor when


contact is open

Reference

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

18

Describe Basics of Ladder Programming


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Motor Control Final Logic


Final ladder diagram has the following features

Separate latching command for forward and reverse running


Prevention from second command if motor is running
Stop command
Protection from overload

Reference

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

19

Describe Basics of Ladder Programming


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Fail Safe Design

Consider fire alarm system with four smoke detectors (FS1 to FS4) and
a Fire Siren (FA)
If any smoke detector detects, then the fire siren must turn ON

The ladder diagram shown here meets the requirement but is not Fail
safe
In case there is discontinuity in connection, the siren will not blow even if the
smoke detector detects a fire condition

Wire break

Switch activated but


Siren is inactive due to
wire break
Reference

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

20

10

Describe Basics of Ladder Programming


2/2/2012

Honeywell

Fail Safe Design

Normally close contact of all the smoke detector switches are connected in
series
Siren will blow in two conditions
Actual smoke detected even by one of the detector
Wire break even in any one of the detector (Fail Safe)

Break in FS1 causes


Flag to deactivate and
Fire alarm will blow

Reference

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

21

Describe Basics of Ladder Programming


2/2/2012

Honeywell

This page intentionally left blank

Reference

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.

22

11

Describe Basics of Ladder Programming


2/2/2012

13

The ladder diagram shown here meets the logical requirement and is
Fail safe

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Topic: Reference
Contents
Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input ...............................................................3

13

Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display ..................................................................................21

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

This page was intentionally left blank.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Reference
Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input

Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input


Practice
Objective

13

The objective of this lab is to create a user-defined function block to scale the Analog Input and
show the actual value.

Prerequisites

SoftMaster is installed and configured

USB cable is connected between ML200R and Experion Server node

Introduction

For scaling the input, use the following formula:


Y = (((Y2 Y1) / (X2 X1))* (X X1)) + Y1

Where,

Y = Scaled Output

Y2 = Maximum Temperature Range.

Y1 = Minimum Temperature Range.

X2 = Maximum Count in ML.

X1 = Minimum Count in ML.

X = Input Received from Field

In class, we will use the Potentiometer in the kit to provide the Analog Input.

The potentiometer input is connected to Channel 0 of the 2MLF-AC8A I/O module in the kit.

Assume the range of analog input as 0 to 100 m3/hr and Count range as 0 to 16000

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Reference
Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input

Procedures

Step

Action

Create User Defined Function Block.


1
ATTENTION
This lab is performed on Physical Hardware. Students
must perform this lab sequentially (one at a time).
Check with the instructor to ensure that the controller
is free before performing the download operation.

Open SoftMaster if not already open.

From the Project Menu in SoftMaster, select New Project

Enter the following information in the New Project dialog box:


Project Name

: Input Scaling

PLC Series

: ML-200 R

Program Name

: Ladder_Program

Program Language

: LD

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Reference
Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input
Step

Action

In the Project Window, select and right-click on User Function/Function Block.

Select Add Item Function Block

13

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Reference
Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input

Step
7

Action
In the User Function/Function Block window, enter the following details:
Program name: SCALING
Language: LD
Select the Use EN/ENO checkbox
Retain the default settings and click OK

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Reference
Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input

Step

In the Project Window of SoftMaster, double-click Local Variables present in the


SCALING function block which we have created.

13

Action

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Reference
Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input

Step
9

Action
Create the local Variables as described in the table below.
Variable Kind

Variable Name

Type

Comment

VAR_INPUT

INT

Input from Field

VAR_INPUT

Y1

REAL

Minimum Range of the Input

VAR_INPUT

Y2

REAL

Maximum Range of the Input

VAR_INPUT

X1

REAL

Min. Count in ML

VAR_INPUT

X2

REAL

Max. Count in ML

VAR_OUTPUT

REAL

Scaled Output in Engineering Units

VAR

X_REAL

REAL

Input from field in Real units

VAR

TEMP_SUB_1

REAL

Temporary Variable to store output


of Y2-Y1 value

VAR

TEMP_SUB_2

REAL

Temporary Variable to store output


of X2-X1 value

VAR

TEMP_DIV

REAL

Temporary Variable to store output


of (Y2-Y1)/(X2-X1) value

VAR

TEMP_SUB_3

REAL

Temporary Variable to store output


of X-X1 value

VAR

TEMP_MUL

REAL

Temporary Variable to store output


of ((Y2-Y1)/(X2-X1)) * (X-X1) value

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Reference
Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input
Step

Action

10

In the Project Window, double-click Program present in the SCALING function block.

11

Select F10 from the LD Toolbar and click on the Program window.

12

In the Function/Function Block dialog, enter the name as SUB and click search.

13

Select SUB in the Function list and click OK.

13

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

Reference
Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input

10

Step

Action

14

In the Program Window, connect the EN pin directly with a horizontal line. Double-click
on the empty space next to the IN1 parameter in SUB block.

15

In the Select Variable window select Local Variable from the Variable List. In the Local
Variable list, select Y1 and click OK.

16

Repeat Steps 13 and 14 to assign Y2 variable to IN2 parameter and TEMP_SUB_1


variable to OUT parameter.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Reference
Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input
Step

Action

17

Repeat Steps 10 to 14 to add another SUB block and INT_TO_*** block and assign the
variables as shown below.

18

Repeat Steps 10 to 14 to add SUB and DIV block and assign the variables as shown
below.

13

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

11

Reference
Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input

12

Step

Action

19

Repeat Steps 10 to 14 to add MUL and ADD block and assign the variables as shown
below.

20

In the Project window, double-click on I/O parameter and configure the FENet module in
Base00 and other I/O modules in Base01.

21

In the Project window, double-click on Program option present in Ladder_Program.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Reference
Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input

2/2/2012

Step

Action

22

Select F10 from the LD Toolbar and click on the Program window.

23

In the Function/Function Block dialog, select <NEWPLC> in the category and then select
SCALING from the Function List. Click OK.

24

In the Select Variable dialog box, click OK. In the Variable Name Add dialog box, click
OK.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

13

13

Reference
Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input

14

Step

Action

25

In the Program Window, connect the EN pin directly with a horizontal line. Double-click
on the empty space next to the X parameter in SCALING block.

26

In the Select Variable dialog box, select the Global Variable option. In the Global
Variable List select Base01, Slot02: 2MLF-AC8A (Current, 8-CH) and then select
0102_CH0_DATA variable. Click OK.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Reference
Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input
Step

Action

27

Double-click on the empty space next to the X1 parameter. In the Select Variable dialog
box, enter the value as 0 and click OK.

28

Repeat step 26 to assign the values for X2, Y1, Y2 parameters as shown below.

29

Double-click on the empty space next to the Y parameter. In the Select Variable dialog
box, select New Variable button.

13

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

15

Reference
Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input

Step
30

Action
In the Variable Name to Add dialog box, enter/select the following:
Variable Name: Value_In_Eng_Units
Data Type: REAL
Address: %MD10
Retain the default values for other parameters and click OK.

16

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Reference
Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input
Step

Action

31

Ensure that the Value_In_Eng_Units variable is selected and click OK in the Select
Variable dialog box.

32

Save the Program.

33

Double-click on I/O Parameter in the Project window. In the I/O Parameter Setting
dialog box, expand Base 01 and then double-click on 2MLF-AC8A (Current, 8-CH).

13

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

17

Reference
Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input

Step

Action

34

In the Module properties dialog, select the Channel status as Enable for CH0. Retain
the default settings for other parameters and click OK.

35

Click OK in the I/O Parameter Setting dialog box.

36

Connect and write the program/parameters to the ML200R CPU.

ATTENTION
Connect and Write options are available in the Online
menu. Before connecting to the ML, ensure that ML is
connected through USB or Ethernet.

18

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Reference
Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input

Step
Select Monitor Start Monitoring.

13

37

Action

ATTENTION
The value in the output is displayed exponentially. For
example, the value which is displayed above in the
screen capture must be read as 0.05625.

38

2/2/2012

Increase/Decrease the value by adjusting the Potentiometer in the kit. Ensure that the
value in the program varies proportionally based on the input provided.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

19

Reference
Create a User Defined Function Block to Scale Analog Input

This page was intentionally left blank.

20

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Reference
Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display

Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display


Practice
Objective

13

The objective of this lab is to create a read the temperature value using RTD and display it in a
BCD display.
Prerequisites

SoftMaster is installed and configured

USB cable is connected between ML200R and Experion Server node

Introduction
In this lab you will perform the following:

Read the Input from RTD

Use the user-defined function block which was created in the previous lab to scale the input

Make the appropriate data conversions and display it in BCD display in the kit

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

21

Reference
Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display

Procedures

Step

Action

1
ATTENTION
This lab is performed on Physical Hardware. Students
must perform this lab sequentially (one at a time).
Check with the instructor and ensure that the controller
is free before performing the download operation.

22

Open SoftMaster and open the Input_Scaling program if not already open.

In the Project window, right click on Scan Program and select Add Item Program.

Enter the Program name as Temperature_Display. Ensure that LD is selected as


Language and click OK.

Double click on Program option in the Project Window which is present under the
Temperature_Display.

Select F10 from the LD Toolbar and click on the Program window.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Reference
Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display
Step

Action

In the Function/Function Block dialog, select <NEWPLC> in the category and then select
SCALING from the Function List. Click OK.

In the Select Variable dialog box, click OK. In the Variable Name Add dialog box, click
OK.

In the Program Window, connect the EN pin directly with a horizontal line. Double click
on the empty space next to the X parameter in SCALING block.

13

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

23

Reference
Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display

24

Step

Action

10

In the Select Variable dialog box, select the Global Variable option. In the Global
Variable List select Base01, Slot04: 2MLF-RD4A (RTD, 4-CH) and then select
0104_CH0_TEMP variable. Click OK.

11

Double click on the empty space next to the X1 parameter. In the Select Variable dialog
box, enter the value as 0 and click OK.

12

Repeat step 11 to assign the values for X2, Y1, Y2 parameters as shown below.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Reference
Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display

Step

Action

13

Double click on the empty space next to the Y parameter. In the Select Variable dialog
box, select New Variable button.

14

In the Variable Name to Add dialog box, enter/select the following:


Variable Name: Actual_Temperature
Data Type: REAL

13

Address: %MD20
Retain the default values for other parameters and click OK.

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

25

Reference
Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display

26

Step

Action

15

Ensure that the Actual Temperature variable is selected and click OK in the Select
Variable dialog box.

16

Select F9 and click in the empty space below the SCALING block. In the Select Variable
dialog box, select Global Variable and enter _0103_CH0_OUTEN as Variable name.
Click OK.

17

Select F10 from the LD Toolbar and click on the Program window.

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Reference
Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display
Step

Action

18

In the Function/Function Block dialog, enter the name as REAL_TO_*** and click
search.

19

Select REAL_TO_*** in the Function list and click OK.

20

In the Program Window, connect the EN pin directly with a horizontal line. Double click
on the empty space next to the IN parameter in REAL_TO_*** block.

21

In the Select Variable window select Local Variable from the Variable List. In the Local
Variable list, select Actual_Temperature and click OK.

13

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

27

Reference
Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display

Step

Action

22

Double click on the empty space next to the OUT parameter in REAL_TO_*** block and
enter %MW30 in the variable name. Click OK in the select Variable dialog box.

23

Repeat steps 17 to 21 and add a ***_TO_BCD function block with the variables as
shown below.

ATTENTION
%QW1.1.1 is the address for BCD display which is
present in kit.

28

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Reference
Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display

Step

Double click on I/O Parameter in the Project window. In the I/O Parameter Setting
dialog box, expand Base 01 and then double click on 2MLF-RD4A (RTD, 4-CH).

13

24

Action

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

29

Reference
Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display

Step
25

Action
In the Module properties dialog, select the Channel status as Enable for CH0. Retain
the default settings for other parameters and click OK.

ATTENTION
For training purpose, we are retaining the default
settings. In an actual plant, parameters of the RTD
must be entered here.

26

Click OK in the I/O Parameter Setting dialog box.

27

Connect and write the program/parameters to the ML200R CPU.

ATTENTION
Connect and Write options are available in the Online
menu. Before connecting to the ML, ensure that ML is
connected through USB or Ethernet.

30

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

Reference
Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display

Step
28

Action
BCD display in the kit will now display the temperature. Rub the RTD physically and
check whether the temperature value is increasing in the BCD display

ATTENTION

2/2/2012

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

13

The temperature shown here might not be actual


temperature. For training purpose, we have reduced
the count during scaling in order to view the small
temperature changes. In actual plant scenario, you
must use the Count as 16000 or 32000 and the device
range must the actual range supported by the device.

31

Reference
Display the Temperature Value in BCD Display

This page was intentionally left blank.

32

Copyright 2012 Honeywell International Inc.


HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary

2/2/2012

EXAMINATION

ML1001R400-Test 01_MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation


1

Points: 1.00
Which of the following special purpose modules is used for recording of events?
A.

Analog Input

B.

DISOE

C.

Temperature measuring

D.

High Speed Counter


Points: 1.00

Which one of the following statements is TRUE for the Input Filter settings in DISOE Module?
A.

Input Filter >= Chattering time interval / Events (No.)

B.

Input Filter = Chattering time interval / Events (No.)

C.

Input Filter <= Chattering time interval / Events (No.)

D.

Input Filter = Chattering time interval * Events (No.)

Points: 1.00

Which modules can be configured on Base 0?


A.

Only CPU and Power Supply

B.

I/O Modules

C.

Max.6 FEnet Modules, CPU and Power Supply

D.

Special Function Modules

Points: 1.00

What is the normal processing speed for ML200R CPU?


A.

<50mSec

B.

10 Sec

C.

Depends upon configuration

D.

42nSec/step

ML200R-EXPERION INTG

Page: 1 of 6

31 January 2012

14

EXAMINATION

ML1001R400-Test 01_MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation


5

Points: 1.00

Module 2MLF RD4A is a special module for:


A.

Analog I/P

B.

Temperature sensing with PT100 and JPT100 sensors

C.

Analog O/P

D.

Position Control

Points: 1.00

What is maximum Local I/O capacity for ML200R PLC considering DI/DOs?
A.

128,000

B.

132,072

C.

There is no limit to define I/Os

D.

23,808

Points: 1.00

What is the switch over time between redundant CPUs?


A.

<50Sec

B.

4 to 22ms

C.

10 Sec

D.

Depends upon configuration

Points: 1.00

Snet module supports the communication via:


A.

RS232

B.

RS485/422

C.

Only A option is correct

D.

A&B

ML200R-EXPERION INTG

Page: 2 of 6

31 January 2012

EXAMINATION

ML1001R400-Test 01_MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation


9

Points: 1.00

Which of the following are the modes of High Speed Counter Module?
A.

Compared Output Mode, Pulse Input Mode

B.

Auxiliary Mode, Counter Mode

C.

Carry and Borrow Signal Mode

D.

All of the above


Points: 1.00

State if the following statement is true or false: Each I/O base should have
separate power supply
A.

False - Maximum Two bases can share one power supply

B.

False - Power Supply present on CPU base is enough for all the bases

C.

True

D.

Partially true- User can decide no. of power supplies

11

Points: 1.00

Is it possible to use the FEnet module for more than one application?
A.

Yes always

B.

Possible with the help of another FEnet module

C.

Possible with any other communication module

D.

Not possible

12

Points: 1.00

What are the functions of RTD Module in ML family?


A.

Averaging

B.

Filtering

C.

Alarming

D.

Max/Min displaying function

E.

All of the above

ML200R-EXPERION INTG

Page: 3 of 6

31 January 2012

14

10

EXAMINATION

ML1001R400-Test 01_MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

13

Points: 1.00

Base no. settings can be done with the help of


A.

Base no. can be set with the help of extension drive modules present on it

B.

No settings are required

C.

Switch settings on the I/O backplane

D.

None of above

14

Points: 1.00

In Thermocouple module Temperature Compensation is done with the help of


which sensor?
A.

Temperature compensation is not required

B.

User can decide the sensor

C.

PT 100

D.

None of above

15

Points: 1.00

Which module on I/O base is used for forming a ring topology with CPUs in
ML200R?
A.

Snet Module

B.

FEnet Module

C.

Extension Drive (2MLR-DBSF/T/H)

D.

I/O Base

16

Points: 1.00

How many maximum slots are available on each I/O base?


A.

12

B.

127

C.

15

D.

63

ML200R-EXPERION INTG

Page: 4 of 6

31 January 2012

EXAMINATION

ML1001R400-Test 01_MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation

17

Points: 1.00

A.

32

B.

C.

31

D.

12

18

Points: 1.00

Is it possible to get 16 bit (1/64000) resolution in case of I/O modules for


ML200R?
(True/False)

19

Points: 1.00

Total Flash memory available is ______.


A.

1MB

B.

2MB

C.

16MB

D.

16MB + 12MB

20

Points: 1.00

What happens if reset button is pressed and released in warm restart mode?
A.

All data will be cleared

B.

Data in retainable area is cleared

C.

Data in Direct and Symbolic area will be cleared but in Retainable area will be
hold

D.

All above answers are true

ML200R-EXPERION INTG

Page: 5 of 6

31 January 2012

14

How many maximum local I/O bases are allowed in ML200R?

EXAMINATION

ML1001R400-Test 01_MasterLogic Architecture and Hardware Installation


21

Points: 1.00

What is the retainable memory size in internal memory area?


A.

256KB

B.

128KB

C.

If battery is provided then all memory area will act as retainable area

D.

None of above options

22

Points: 1.00
Profibus Slave Interface module is placed in ____________
A.

ML200 CPU base

B.

ML200/ML200R I/O base

C.

ML200R CPU base

23

Points: 1.00
Which of the following module is used in Dual I/O link redundancy?
A.

FEnet Interface Module

B.

Expansion Driver module (2MLL-DBST/F/H)

C.

Expansion Redundancy Driver Module (2MLL-DBDT/F/H)

ML200R-EXPERION INTG

Page: 6 of 6

31 January 2012

EXAMINATION

ML1001R400-Test 02_MasterLogic Software Introduction


1

Points: 1.00

SoftMaster is a tool used for configuration of:


A.

I/O Parameters

B.

Basic Parameters

C.

Ladder Programming

D.

All of above
Points: 1.00

Which of the following programming techniques are supported by ML 200R PLC?


A.

Ladder Logic

B.

Instruction list (View Only)

C.

SFC + ST

D.

All of the above

Points: 1.00

Is it possible to compare only the one scan program between two different
projects using SoftMaster?
A.

Yes, by selecting Program in Compare project Dialog box

B.

Yes ,but along with Global Variables

C.

Not Possible

D.

Yes, but along with I/O parameters

Points: 1.00

Import/Export option is available for which of the parameters in SoftMaster?


A.

I/O Parameters

B.

Global Variables

C.

Basic Parameters

D.

All of the above

ML200R-EXPERION INTG

Page: 1 of 4

19 April 2012

14

EXAMINATION

ML1001R400-Test 02_MasterLogic Software Introduction


5

Points: 1.00

Simulator is used for ________.


A.

Checking the redundancy functions

B.

Checking logic

C.

Checking system status

D.

Checking logics but requires special hardware to implement

Points: 1.00

Watchdog timer setting is ______.


A.

20mSec

B.

50msec

C.

10mSec ~ 1000mSec

D.

B&C

Points: 1.00

If an error occurs in Analog O/P module, the channel value becomes


__________.
A.

Minimum

B.

Maximum

C.

Former

D.

It is user configurable

Points: 1.00

Redundancy is provided for which parameters?


A.

Redundant CPU +Power Supply

B.

Redundant CPU+ Redundant I/Os

C.

Redundant controller + Redundant & Non Redundant I/O

D.

Redundant CPU + Redundant Power Supply + Redundant IO Communication

ML200R-EXPERION INTG

Page: 2 of 4

19 April 2012

EXAMINATION

ML1001R400-Test 02_MasterLogic Software Introduction


9

Points: 1.00

Is it possible to include more than one scan program in one project?


A.

Yes

B.

No

C.

Sometimes

D.

Maximum two scan programs are allowed

10

Points: 1.00

A.

Windows XP Professional

B.

Windows NT

C.

Windows 2000

D.

Any of the above

11

14

What is the OS required for using Sycon software?

Points: 1.00

Which of the following functionalities can be performed by SoftMaster as an


engineering software?
A.

Programming, configuration, simulation

B.

Monitoring, debugging

C.

Troubleshooting, documentation

D.

All of the above

12

Points: 1.00

User defined function blocks can be created using which of the following
programming languages?
A.

Ladder Diagram

B.

Structured Text

C.

Function Block

D.

A&B

ML200R-EXPERION INTG

Page: 3 of 4

19 April 2012

EXAMINATION

ML1001R400-Test 02_MasterLogic Software Introduction


13

Points: 1.00

What is the retainable memory size in internal memory area?


A.

256KB

B.

128KB

C.

If battery is provided then all memory area will act as retainable area

D.

None of above options

14

Points: 1.00

A User Defined Function Block is


A.

an exiting function block available in SoftMaster which can be edited by User

B.

not available in SoftMaster

C.

a custom function block created by User

ML200R-EXPERION INTG

Page: 4 of 4

19 April 2012

EXAMINATION

ML1001R400-Test 03_MasterLogic Programming Languages


1

Points: 1.00

A.

If status bit is 1 (ON), then instruction is false

B.

If status bit is 1 (ON), then instruction is true

C.

If status bit is 0 (OFF), then instruction is false

D.

If status bit is 0 (OFF), then instruction is true

E.

B&C

Points: 1.00

Ladder Diagram Programming is used for:


A.

logical / relay / timer / counter operations

B.

State transition/step action based batch applications

C.

A mnemonic programming

D.

None of above

Points: 1.00

How many PID loops can be configured in one project?


A.

B.

C.

256

D.

32

ML200R-EXPERION INTG

Page: 1 of 2

31 January 2012

14

symbol in Ladder Diagram stands for:

EXAMINATION

ML1001R400-Test 03_MasterLogic Programming Languages


4

Points: 1.00

A programming language which is similar to PASCAL or BASIC like high level


languages is _________.
A.

Ladder Logic

B.

Instruction List

C.

Function Block

D.

Structured Text

Points: 1.00

Sequential Function Chart programming language uses:


A.

Graphical configuration of steps / transition diagrams

B.

Structured Text

C.

Function Block

D.

Ladder Diagram

ML200R-EXPERION INTG

Page: 2 of 2

31 January 2012

EXAMINATION

ML1001R400-Test 04_MasterLogic Communication Protocols


1

Points: 1.00

FEnet module can be used for the applications such as:


A.

Experion Integration

B.

Peer-2-Peer

C.

MODBUS TCP, User defined protocol

D.

All of the above

Points: 1.00

A.

Slave Device

B.

Master Device

C.

Input Module

D.

Communication Interface

14

In SyCon configuration tool, Pnet module is used as

Points: 1.00

In SoftMaster-NM, Sycon Upload is used for:


A.

Uploading the Sycon Configuration for Dnet in NM

B.

Uploading the NM Configuration in Sycon

C.

Uploading from PLC

D.

Downloading SyCon configurations into PLC

Points: 1.00

What is 2MLL CH2A module used for?


A.

For connecting to the Profibus Devices

B.

For line monitoring on channel level

C.

For Serial communication

D.

It is a dummy module

ML200R-EXPERION INTG

Page: 1 of 2

31 January 2012

EXAMINATION

ML1001R400-Test 04_MasterLogic Communication Protocols


5

Points: 1.00

Where are communication related parameters configured?


A.

Sycon software

B.

SoftMaster NM

C.

SoftMaster

D.

ModBus Tool

Points: 1.00
ONEIP Solution is used
A.

To integrate ML System with 3rd party SCADA systems which supports only
One IP communication support

B.

To integrate ML System with Experion system which supports only One IP


communication support

C.

To integrate ML System with All Experion Systems

D.

For Profibus configuration in Sycon Tool

Points: 1.00
State True or False
ONEIP solution must be used only for Experion Communication
(True/False)

ML200R-EXPERION INTG

Page: 2 of 2

31 January 2012

EXAMINATION

ML1001R400-Test 05_MODBUS and High Speed Link Communication Using MasterLogic


1

Points: 1.00

Communication between two ML PLCs can be established using _______.


A.

High Speed Link

B.

P2P Link

C.

Both A & B

D.

Only with Serial link


Points: 1.00

Modbus TCP Client option is available only if 2 devices are integrated using
______ functionality.
A.

P2P

B.

High Speed Link

C.

Modbus Tool

D.

All of the above

Points: 1.00

ML200R supports Modbus TCP/IP protocol with the help of ____ module.
A.

FEnet

B.

Snet

C.

Pnet

D.

Dnet

ML200R-EXPERION INTG

Page: 1 of 2

31 January 2012

14

EXAMINATION

ML1001R400-Test 05_MODBUS and High Speed Link Communication Using MasterLogic

ML200R-EXPERION INTG

Page: 2 of 2

31 January 2012

EXAMINATION

ML1001R400-Test 06_Online Functions in SoftMaster And SoftMaster-NM


1

Points: 1.00

PID loop can be monitored in SoftMaster using ______.


A.

System Monitoring

B.

Special Module Monitoring

C.

PID Monitoring

D.

PLC History

Points: 1.00

A.

Key switch on 2MLR-CPUH/T Module

B.

Sycon

C.

SoftMaster

D.

SoftMaster-NM

14

Debugging mode can be set with the help of _____.

Points: 1.00

What is the "Enable Link" option in SoftMaster NM used for?


A.

High-Speed Link

B.

P2P

C.

A&B

D.

ModBus Link

Points: 1.00

Before any on-line modification can be carried out, some preparations need to be
made. Which of the following answers is not part of the preparation phase?
A.

compare projects

B.

make a backup of the application files

C.

make sure that both CPUs are running

D.

Perform a system reset

ML200R-EXPERION INTG

Page: 1 of 2

31 January 2012

EXAMINATION

ML1001R400-Test 06_Online Functions in SoftMaster And SoftMaster-NM


5

Points: 1.00
State True or False
Hot Swapping of modules is supported in ML200
(True/False)

ML200R-EXPERION INTG

Page: 2 of 2

31 January 2012

EXAMINATION

ML1001R400-Test 07_Experion Integration


1

Points: 1.00

A.

Operating System

B.

Hardware Specifications

C.

Number of PLCs

D.

Number of points

E.

C&D

Points: 1.00

What is the prerequisite for installing ML server?


A.

Installed Experion Server with OPC client license

B.

Installed Experion Server with OPC Server

C.

Control Builder must be installed

D.

Quick Builder must be installed

Points: 1.00

ML Server can be loaded on _______.


A.

OPC Server

B.

Experion Server

C.

SoftMaster Server

D.

All of the above

Points: 1.00

What is the prerequisite for getting MLDP license?


A.

Valid Voucher ID

B.

HostID.zip file

C.

HostID.HID file

D.

All of above

ML200R-EXPERION INTG

Page: 1 of 2

31 January 2012

14

In MLDP software license which of the following items are mentioned?

EXAMINATION

ML1001R400-Test 07_Experion Integration


5

Points: 1.00

For installing a MLDP license on Experion PKS ____ utility is used.


A.

Configuration Tool

B.

License Registration

C.

PointBuild Utility

D.

License utility

Points: 1.00

IP address of ML PLC for the communication with Experion is configured using


________.
A.

Configuration Studio

B.

SoftMaster

C.

Quick Builder

D.

Control Builder

ML200R-EXPERION INTG

Page: 2 of 2

31 January 2012

EXAMINATION

ML1001R400-Test 08_Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station


1

Points: 1.00

Which of the following are MasterLogic System Display files in Experion?


A.

MLPLC_Config.htm

B.

MLPLC_Driver.htm

C.

MLSOEConfig.xsd

D.

A&B
Points: 1.00

PV source address for a ML status point in Experion consists of which of the


following?
A.

PLC Name

B.

Memory address

C.

Data type

D.

All of the above

Points: 1.00
An Experion Channel is a connection between _________.
A.

EPKS server and a printer

B.

EPKS server and a station

C.

EPKS server and a C 200 controller

D.

EPKS server and a ML PLC

Points: 1.00

Configuration of MasterLogic PLC can be observed on Experion Station with the


help of ________ display.
A.

MLPLC_Driver.htm

B.

MLPLC_Config.htm

C.

MLSOEConfig.xsd

ML200R-EXPERION INTG

Page: 1 of 2

31 January 2012

14

EXAMINATION

ML1001R400-Test 08_Monitoring MasterLogic Status in Station

ML200R-EXPERION INTG

Page: 2 of 2

31 January 2012

EXAMINATION

ML1001R400-Test 09_LM-ML Migration Support


1

Points: 1.00

Which of the following statements is true about LM to ML migration?


Without disturbing existing Field wiring connections

B.

Through Integration of Serial Interface card of HPM

C.

Through Integration of Enhanced PLC Gateway

D.

All of the above

14

A.

ML200R-EXPERION INTG

Page: 1 of 2

31 January 2012

EXAMINATION

ML1001R400-Test 09_LM-ML Migration Support

ML200R-EXPERION INTG

Page: 2 of 2

31 January 2012

EXAMINATION

ML1001R400-Test 10_MasterLogic Troubleshooting


1

Points: 1.00

If base address is more than 31 then ________.


A.

ERR LED on extension drive module will be ON

B.

CHK LED on extension drive module will be ON

C.

Warning will be generated

D.

CPU will trip

Points: 1.00

A.

One CPU is in stop condition

B.

I/O module error occurs

C.

Data transmitted and received is different

D.

All of the above answers are true

14

Frame error occurs if _________.

Points: 1.00

Which of the following statements is true in case of critical error in CPU?


A.

Error LED on CPU module is ON

B.

4 digit operation LED display will show the error code

C.

Error is logged in PLC Error log

D.

All of the above

ML200R-EXPERION INTG

Page: 1 of 2

31 January 2012

EXAMINATION

ML1001R400-Test 10_MasterLogic Troubleshooting

ML200R-EXPERION INTG

Page: 2 of 2

31 January 2012

More Information
To learn more about Automation College,
view a list of global locations and available
training, visit www.automationcollege.com
or email HPSWeb@Honeywell.com
.
Honeywell
Automation & Control Solutions
Process Solutions
Automation College
www.honeywellprocess.com

January 2012
2012 Honeywell International Inc.

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi